CITY OF AUSTIN Austin Water PROJECT MANUAL Contract ...

The City of Austin is committed to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act Reasonable modifications and equal access to communications will be provided upon request

CITY OF AUSTIN Austin Water

PROJECT MANUAL Contract Documents and Technical Specifications

VOLUME 2 of 5

South Austin Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant Electrical Substation No 1 Replacement Project

CIP PROJECT NUMBER 3333032 SOLICITATION NUMBER CLMC739

CITY OF AUSTIN Public Works Department

PO Box 1088 Austin Texas 78767

Documents Prepared By

8100 Cross Park Drive Austin Texas 78754

TBPE Firm Registration No F-2408

In Association With AECOM

CAS Consulting amp Services Inc HVJ Associates Inc

Jose I Guerra Inc Macias amp Associates LP MWM Design Group Inc

CONFORMED DOCUMENT

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

South Austin Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant

Electrical Substation No 1 Replacement Project

PROJECT MANUAL

Submitted by

Specification Sections All specification sections with exception of those sections

listed on the following pages

Kegham A Harutunian Texas PE No 59181 Anne H Harutunian Texas PE No 115716

Shant Harutunian Texas PE No 87735 Vigain Harutunian Texas PE No 87736

Bidding Requirements Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Rev Date 092719 Table of Contents Page 1 of 6

VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 092719 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS amp CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT PRE-BID INFORMATION 00020 081219 Invitation for Bids INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 081219 Instructions to Bidders INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS00220 033018 Geotechnical Data BID FORMS 00300L 081219 Bid Form-Lump Sum SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00400 043019 Statement of Bidderrsquos Experience 00405 033018 Certificate of Non-Suspension Or Debarment 00410 091718 Statement of Bidderrsquos Safety Experience 00440 052019 Affidavit ndash Prohibited Activities AGREEMENT FORM 00500 081219 Agreement BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 033018 Performance Bond 00620 033018 Payment Bond 00630 033018 Non-Discrimination and Non-Retaliation Certificate 00631 033018 Title VI Assurances Appendix A 00632 033018 Title VI Assurances Appendix E 00650 060818 Certificate of Insurance 00670 011119 Sales Tax Exemption Certificate 00680 033018 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit (Contractor Prior To Construction) 00681 033018 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit (Contractor After Construction) GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 081219 General Conditions

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00810 081219 Supplemental General Conditions 00810A 091718 Federal Contract Provisions 00819 030717 Security Requirements 102419 Sp-1070 ndash Facility Security Procedure For Contractors 00820 033018 Modifications To Bidding Requirements and Contract Forms 00830 091718 Wage Rates and Payroll Reporting 00830HH 011119 Wage Rates Highway Heavy 00830BC 101419 Wage Rates Building Construction Trades 00840 092719 Construction Training Program Requirements 00900 011119 Addendum (SAMPLE) WRD-255 0117 Bidderrsquos Certifications ED-103 092616 Contractors Act of Assurance ED-104 100616 Contractors Act of Assurance Resolution SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 ndash GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 033018 Summary of Work 01020 033018 Allowances 01025 091718 Measurement and Payment 01050 101915 Grades Lines and Levels 01095 072103 Reference Standards and Definitions 01096 050611 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) 01200 080912 Project Meetings 01300 011119 Submittals 01310 102813 Progress Schedules 01352 062918 Sustainable Construction Requirements 01353 080912 Construction Equipment Emissions Reduction Plan 01380 080912 Construction Photography amp Videos 01500 081219 Temporary Facilities 01505 081219 Construction and Demolition Waste Management 01510 062918 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan 01550 080912 Public Safety and Convenience 01600 090814 Material and Equipment 01730 090814 Operation and Maintenance Data 01900 031212 Prohibition of Asbestos Containing Material 01900A 060506 Statement of Non-Inclusion of Asbestos Containing Material (EA

Prior To Design) 01900B 060506 Statement of Non-Inclusion of Asbestos Containing Material (EA

After Design)

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SERIES 100 ndash EARTHWORK 102S 082007 Clearing and Grubbing 104S 092612 Removing Portland Cement Concrete 110S 111804 Street Excavation 111S 092612 Excavation 130S 092612 Borrow 132S 082007 Embankment SERIES 200 ndash SUBGRADE AND BASE CONSTRUCTION 201S 082007 Subgrade Preparation 202S 081800 Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry 203S 092612 Lime Treatment for Materials in Place 210S 022410 Flexible Base 220S 022410 Sprinkling for Dust Control 230S 082007 Rolling (Flat Wheel) 232S 082007 Rolling (Pneumatic Tire) 236S 082007 Proof Rolling SERIES 300 ndash STREET SURFACE COURSES 360S 092612 Concrete Pavement SERIES 400 ndash CONCRETE STRUCTURES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE 401S 092612 Structural Excavation and Backfill 402S 111307 Controlled Low Strength Material 403S 092612 Concrete for Structures 406S 092612 Reinforcing Steel 410S 092612 Concrete Structures 411S 111307 Surface Finishes For Concrete 420S 092612 Drilled Shaft Foundations 432S 010410 Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalks 433S 120908 P C Concrete Driveways SERIES 500 ndash PIPE AND APPURTENANCES 503S 021700 Frames Grates Rings and Covers 506 031511 Manholes 509S 092612 Excavation Safety Systems 510 120818 Pipe 591S 010416 Riprap for Slope Protection SERIES 600 ndash ENVIRONMENTAL ENHANCEMENT 601S 111416 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil 602S 061608 Sodding for Erosion Control 604S 010416 Seeding for Erosion Control 606S 062107 Fertilizer 608S 092612 Planting 609S 010416 Native Grassland Seeding and Planting for Erosion Control

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

610S 120718 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation 627S 092612 GrassLined Swale 639S 081810 Rock Berm 641S 062107 Stabilized Construction Entrance (SCE) 642S 090111 Silt Fence SERIES 700 ndash INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION 700S 092612 Mobilization 701S 092612 Fencing 702S 052002 Removal and Relocation of Existing Fences SERIES 800 ndash URBAN TRANSPORTATION 802S 092612 Project Signs 803S 111511 Barricades Signs and Traffic Handling SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SP 1 072613 Special Provision to the Measurement and Payment Section of the

City of Austin Standard Technical Specifications SP 102S 090616 Special Provision to Clearing and Grubbing SP 132S 090616 Special Provision to Embankment SP 401S 100819 Special Provision to Structural Excavation and Backfill SP 403S 041018 Special Provision to Concrete for Structures SP 406S 070518 Special Provision to Reinforcing Steel SP 410S 041018 Special Provision to Concrete Structures VOLUME 2 Special Specifications 092719 Table of Contents DIVISION 2 ndash SITE CONSTRUCTION 02831 041318 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized DIVISION 3 ndash CONCRETE 03392 091718 Penetrating Concrete Sealant DIVISION 4 ndash MASONRY 04090 091818 Masonry Accessories 04100 041018 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04211 091718 Brick Masonry 04220 011619 Concrete Masonry Units DIVISION 5 ndash METALS 05120 041018 Structural Steel 05210 041018 Steel Joists

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

05310 041018 Steel Deck 05500 041018 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 ndash WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 091718 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 ndash THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07130 080218 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier 07210 091718 Building Insulation 07220 040618 Roof Insulation 07411 091718 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 07620 091718 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07920 040618 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 ndash DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 040618 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08330 040618 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors 08411 040618 Aluminum Framed Windows 08711 040618 Finish Hardware 08800 091718 Glazing DIVISION 9 ndash FINISHES 09900 040618 Painting DIVISION 10 ndash SPECIALTIES 10400 112017 Signage 10441 040618 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 ndash EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 ndash FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 ndash SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13851 111319 Fire Alarm System DIVISION 14 ndash CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 ndash MECHANICAL 15061 100719 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15083 100719 Pipe Insulation 15183 100719 Refrigerant Piping 15184 100719 Copper Piping and Accessories 15500 100719 General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods 15780 100719 Scrubbers 15783 100719 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units 15815 100719 Metal Ducts

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

15820 100719 Duct Accessories 15855 100719 Diffusers Registers and Grilles 15990 100719 Testing Adjusting and Balancing VOLUME 3 Special Specifications (Contrsquod) 092719 Table of Contents DIVISION 16 ndash ELECTRICAL 16044 100719 15KV Metal Clad Switchgear and 15KV Medium Voltage Overhead

Bus Ducts 16045 100719 Modifications to Existing 15KV Metal Clad Switchgear 16080 120519 Direct Current ldquoDCrdquo Power Storage Charging ldquoDCrdquo Distribution and

Inversion System 16150 100719 Raceways Fittings and Supports 16182 100719 Medium Voltage Cables 16200 100719 Wiring (600 Volts and Below) 16250 100719 Boxes and Cabinets 16300 100719 Wiring Devices 16350 100719 Lighting 16444 100719 Combination Motor Starters 16450 100719 600 Volt and Below Dry Type Transformers 16480 100719 Over 600 Volts Dry Type Transformers for Outdoor Service 16500 100719 Panelboards 16520 100719 Automatic Transfer Switch and Bypass Isolation Switches 16550 100719 Grounding 16600 100719 Disconnect Switches and Enclosed Circuit Breakers 16800 100719 Calibration Testing and Setting DIVISION 17 ndash INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 17100 100719 Process Instrumentation and Control System PICS 17200 100719 Instrument and Control Cabinets and Associated Equipment 17380 100719 Field Instrumentation and Sensing Devices 17600 100719 Distributed Control System VOL 4 101419 MBEWBE Procurement Program Package VOL 5 100819 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan END

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 02831 ndash Page 1 of 4 Chain Link Fence - Galvanized

AECOM TBPE Firm F-3580 041318

SECTION 02831

CHAIN LINK FENCE - GALVANIZED

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 DESCRIPTION

A Scope This Item governs for furnishing and installing chain link fence and related labor

materials and accessories complete in place

B Work Specified Elsewhere Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified

elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

102 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300 ldquoSubmittalsrdquo

A Product data for all materials used

B Shop drawings showing sizes fabrication anchorage finishes and other pertinent data

103 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A Deliver fabric posts gates and accessories to job site with sufficient protection bracing

etc to ensure arrival in undamaged condition

B Store in original bundles on level supports and protect to prevent damage until erected

C The uniformity of the zinc coating shall be determined by visual inspection If in the

opinion of the ENGINEER visual examination is not conclusive he may use the Preece

Test as described in ASTM A239 When so tested all items shall withstand a minimum

of 6 one-minute dips except for those items designated in ASTM A153 as Class B-2

B-3 C and D which shall withstand a minimum of 4 one-minute dips

D Careful visual inspection shall be made to determine the quality of the zinc coating

Excessive roughness blisters salammoniac spots bruises and flaking if present to any

considerable extent shall provide a basis for rejection Where practicable all inspection

and tests shall be made at the place of manufacturer prior to shipment and shall be so

conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the progress of the work

E Damaged spelter coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged area

and removing all loose cracked or weld-burner spelter coating The cleaned area shall be

painted with 2 coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of

Federal Specification TT-P-641B The paint shall be furnished at his expense

104 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

A Fabric to conform to ASTM A392 6 feet high No 9 WampM gage wire Unless otherwise

shown on PLANS or in Special Provision to this Item use Class 2 zinc coating Top and

bottom selvages to be twisted and barbed

B Barbed wire when specified to be 3 lines of wire mounted on extension arms and

conforming to ASTM A121 No 12-12 WampM gage wire with 4-point barbs and Class 3

zinc coating

C Line posts to be 2frac14-inch rolled ldquoHrdquo section of high carbon steel minimum weight

41 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A36 or 2375-inch OD Schedule 40 steel

pipe minimum weight 365 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A120

D End corner and pull posts to be 2frac12-inch square tubular steel minimum weight

E Swing gate posts shown in the following table to be in accordance with ASTM A120

Schedule 40 for steel pipe and ASTM A501 for steel tubing

Pipe Size OD Square Tubular Min Weight Per Ft Leaf Length

2875-inch 2frac12-inch 579 lbs Up to 6 feet

40-inch 3-inch 911 lbs Over 6 feet to 10 feet

6625-inch 1897 lbs Over 10 feet to 16 feet

F Top rails and bracing to be 1660-inch OD Schedule 40 steel pipe minimum weight

227 pounds per foot conforming to ASTM A120 in random lengths averaging 20 feet

with minimum lengths of 10 feet

G Barbed wire extension arms to be standard 45 degree one-piece three wire capacity with

steel conforming to ASTM A36

H Swing gates to be standard heavy type welded watertight rigid frame 190-inch OD

Schedule 40 steel pipe minimum weight 272 pounds per foot conforming to

ASTM A120 or 2-inch square tubular steel minimum weight 269 pounds per foot

conforming to ASTM A501

I Hot-dip galvanize component metal parts of fence (except fabric and barbed wire) with

minimum standard zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153

J Miscellaneous

1 Tension Wire 7 gauge

2 End Caps Galvanized malleable iron - acorn style

3 End Fittings Galvanized malleable iron

4 Padlocks Furnish heavy-duty padlocks for all gates Padlocks furnished are to

be master-keyed to match OWNERrsquos existing locks (if applicable) Furnish

OWNER a minimum of five (5) sets of keys Padlocks to have minimum 38Prime

hardened steel shank Master Lock No 5 or equal

202 - 204 (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

A Install chain link fence to the lines grades and locations shown on PLANS

B Maximum post spacing unless shown otherwise on PLANS is not to exceed 8 feet Set

posts equal to or smaller than 2375-inch OD pipe and 2frac14-inch square tubular or

ldquoHrdquo shapes 36 inches minimum into concrete Set larger posts and all gate posts

42 inches minimum into concrete Set posts in Class ldquoArdquo concrete with minimum of

6-inch concrete cover Top of concrete to be 1 inch above ground and crowned to shed

water All concrete shall be reinforced with no less than three 6 inch diameter times 2 inch

pitch spiraled loops of No 4 gage wire

C Erect fencing to generally follow ground surface and adjust irregularities in grade

Where depressions or swales are crossed by fencing provide galvanized pipe and wire

fabric laced to main fabric to prevent entrance of small animals but permit natural

drainage flow

D When shown on the PLANS a continuous concrete mowing strip shall be installed

Construct mowing strip with Class ldquoArdquo concrete finished to grade of surrounding ground

Reinforce with 6Prime times 6Prime times frac14Prime WWM Mowing strip shall not be installed between gate

E Join top rails with suitable sleeve-type couplings making rigid connections with

provisions for expansion and contraction Pass rail through base of line post barbed wire

extension arm and fasten securely to terminal post

F Brace all terminal posts with brace member securely fastened to terminal and first line

post Tie terminal post near ground line to line post at brace member with steel tension

rod of 38-inch minimum diameter complete with turnbuckle

G Provide hole in barbed wire extension arms for top rail on line posts and for connection

of top rail at corner posts Extension arm to be capable of supporting 300-pound load at

end of mounted arm

H Securely fasten chain link fence wire fabric as follows

1 To terminal posts using 14-inch times 34-inch tension bars with 11-gage pressed

steel bands spaced approximately 14 inches apart

2 To line posts with 6-gauge wire clips spaced approximately 14 inches apart

3 To top rail with 9-gauge tie wires spaced approximately 24 inches apart

I CONTRACTOR to be responsible for swing gate design using same fabric as for fence

and in accordance with dimensions shown on PLANS Furnish hinges latches stops

keepers and other accessories Gate to swing open 180 degrees as shown on PLANS

with keepers to hold in open position Furnish latches with provisions for padlocking

For gates less than 4-foot lengths provide latches which automatically engage when gate

swings shut

J This fence shall be grounded where a power line passes over the fence In any case a

ground shall be provided at not to exceed 1000 feet apart in straight runs of fence Each

individual section of fence shall have at least 1 ground The ground shall consist of a

copper-weld rod 8 feet long and a minimum of 58-inch in diameter driven or drilled in

vertically until the top of the rod is approximately 6 inches below the top of the ground

A No 6 solid copper conductor shall be approximately 6 inches below the top of the

ground A No 6 solid copper conductor shall be brazed to the rod and to the fence in

such a manner that each element of the fence is grounded

302 - 310 (NOT USED)

311 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of

same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 03392- Page 1 of 2 Penetrating Concrete Sealant MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 03392

PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALANT

PART 1 GENERAL

101 SECTION INCLUDES

A Materials and procedures for applying protective penetrating concrete sealant

102 RELATED SECTIONS Not Used

103 REFERENCES

A AASHTO T 242 Standard Test Method for Frictional Properties of Paved Surfaces Using a Full-

Scale Tire

104 DEFINITIONS Not Used

105 SUBMITTALS

A Manufacturerrsquos product data specifications and recommended installation instructions

B Certification of a minimum Friction Number of 40 for at least 90 percent of friction numbers Re-

fer to AASHTO T 242

1 Applies only to traveled way surfaces where the plans require sealant

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALANTS

A Choose from the following list

1 Silane

2 Siloxane

3 SilicateSiliconate Polymer

B Physical Properties

1 Crystal clear (non-yellowing)

2 High-gloss finish

C Compliance

1 ASTM C-1315 Type I Class A

2 NCHRP 244 Chloride Ion

3 Meets USDA and ADA non-slip requirements (use of non-slip admixtures is permitted to

meet these standards

4 VOC Content lt5gL

D Acceptable products include (but ate not limited to)

1 EUCO Diamond Hard Densifier and Sealer as manufactured by Euclid Chemical

9172018

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

A Keep surfaces dry and free of laitance dirt dust paint grease oil rust and other contaminants

B Remove any curing compound from the surface of the concrete before applying penetrating seal-

C Use one of the following cleaning methods

1 Hydroblasting - 700 psi min

2 Shotblasting

3 Sandblasting

4 Etching

D Keep concrete surface matrix intact without exposing any large aggregate

E Cure concrete for 28 days before sealant application

F Obtain approval from the Architect before applying material

302 APPLICATION

A Application Rate

1 Apply according to manufacturerrsquos recommendations for each of the following surfaces

a Horizontal Unless otherwise noted all horizontal exposed concrete surfaces

within the building shall be finished with penetrating concrete sealant

B Application Drying Time Select a sealant with maximum drying time of 1frac12 hours

C Do not apply sealant to portland cement concrete pavement (PCCP) Meet the minimum Friction

Number of 40 for at least 90 percent of friction numbers when plans specify application to other

traveled way surfaces such as approach slabs bridge decks etc Refer to AASHTO T 242

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04090 ndash Page 1 of 4 91818 Masonry AccessoriesJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 04090

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes

1 Adjustable veneer anchors2 Adjustable wall ties3 Control joint filler4 Column Anchors and Ties5 Reinforcing bars6 Sheet metal ties7 Wall tie screws8 Wire joint reinforcement single Wythe type9 Masonry flashing and drainage systems

12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all

B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work

13 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only

A ASTM International (ASTM)

1 A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire Plain for Concrete Reinforcement2 A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware3 A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement4 A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire5 A 951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement6 C 549 - Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation7 D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications8 D 2287 - Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer

Molding and Extrusion Compounds

14 ndash 15 (NOT USED)

16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

21ndash 22 (NOT USED)

23 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A Adjustable wall ties 2-piece zinc coated fabrications minimum 316-inch diameter steel wire formed into hook or pin and eye pieces capable of restraining compression and tension forces from veneer

1 Manufacturers one of the following or equal

a Dur-O-Wal Inc DA 518 and DA 213b AA Wire Products Co equivalent productc Wire-Bond equivalent product

B Control joint filler The key shall be of the width and shape as indicated on the Drawings In accordance with ASTM D 2000 or ASTM D 2287

a AA Wire Products Inc AA2000 Blok-Titeb Dur-O-Wall Rapid Poly-Jointc Vert-A-Joint Co Vert-A-Joint

C Foamed-in-place insulation as required by Section 07214

D Reinforcing bars in accordance with ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed billet steel bars

Sheet metal ties minimum [22] gauge corrosion resistant corrugated sheet metal minimum 78 inch wide by 7 inches long pre-punched for wire ties to wire joint reinforcement

E Wire joint reinforcement single Wythe type Conforming to ASTM A 951 with ASTM A 82 9-gauge wire side rails and 9-gauge cross ties sized to suit application and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 Class B (minimum 15 ounces zinc per square foot

a AA Wire Products Co AA500 Blok-Lokb Dur-O-Wal Inc Ladur-typec Wire-Bond Ladder Type Series 200

F Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Drainage System stainless steel drainage strip and vertical mesh sleeve to allow moisture to drain out of single wythe system

1 Manufacturers the following or equal

a Mortar Net Inc Gary IN BN120 CMU Drainage System including the following

1) Drainage Strip BN 121 28 ga stainless steel with formed drip edge on the face edge and drainage mesh factory attached

2) Vertical Mesh Sleeve BN 122 7 X 7 X 38 inch thick polyester mesh3) Sealant as approved by manufacturer

G Masonry Drainage and Flashing System system includes flashing cavity wall drainage drip edge termination bar and weeps

a Mortar Net Inc Gary IN Total Flash System including the following

1) Flashing Membrane Hyload 40 mil polymetric reinforced UV stable membrane with DupPantrsquos Elvaloy KEE polymer

2) Mortar Collection DeviceWeep Tabs Recycled polyester material impregnated with UV protection biocide to resist mold and flame retardant woven mesh designed to allow moisture to migrate to the integrated weep tabs product adhered to flashing membrane 316 inch thick 10 inches high 5 frac12 feet lengths

3) Drip edge 304 stainless steel drip edge pre-attached to flashing membrane with formed drip edge

4) Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer5) Termination bar high strength corrosion resistant plastic strip with pre-drilled

holes spaced at 6 inches6) Screws as recommended by manufacturer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 (NOT USED)

32 (NOT USED)

33 INSTALLATION

A Install products as specified in Section 04220 and in accordance with Manufacturerrsquos installation instructions

Unless otherwise indicated no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work which is a component part

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04100 ndash Page 1 of 5 41018 Mortar and Masonry GroutJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 04100

MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes Mortar and masonry grout

B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work

13 REFERENCES

A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1 C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar2 C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement3 C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes4 C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry5 C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout6 C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry7 C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry

B International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)

1 International Building Code (IBC) Standards

a ASTM C 140 - 02C ndash Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Unitsb ASTM C 1019 ndash 03 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Grout

C The Masonry Society

1 TMS MSJC - Building Code for Masonry Structures (ACI 530ASCE 5TMS 402) Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602) and Commentaries

14 DEFINITIONS

A Alkali Sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide

15 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A Performance Requirements

1 Mortar for masonry shall be by proportion in accordance with ASTM C270 Type ldquoSrdquo except all below-grade mortar shall be Type ldquoMrdquo

2 Grout for hollow masonry units shall be by proportion in accordance with ASTM C476 and shall be normal-weight pea gravel concrete

3 Mortar color shall be submitted and determined by ENGINEER

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

C Samples Include mortar color samples

D Design Data Design Mixes for mortar and grout

E Not Used

F Submit all required LEED documentation for mandatory and desirable credits noted in paragraph 0 per the submittal requirements outlined in Section 01352

1 Materials Resources Certificates

a Certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site

2 Indoor Air Quality Certificates

a Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer

17 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Materials for Mortar and Grout Do not change source of materials which will affect the appearance of finished work after the work has started unless acceptable to ENGINEER

18 (NOT USED)

19 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A Environmental Requirements

1 Cold Weather Requirements

a In accordance with the applicable building codeb Provide adequate equipment for heating mortar and grout materials when air

temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit Temperatures of separate materials including water shall not exceed 140 degrees Fahrenheit when placed in mixer Maintain mortar temperature on boards above freezing

2 Hot Weather Requirements Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used

110-111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

A Portland Cement In accordance with ASTM C 150 Type II low alkali containing maximum 06 percent total alkali

B Hydrated Lime In accordance with ASTM C 207 Type S

C Aggregate

1 Fine Aggregate In accordance with ASTM C 144 sand2 Coarse Aggregate In accordance with ASTM C 404 coarse size Number 8

D Admixtures

1 Color Admixture Type containing maximum 15 percent lime proof inorganic compounds unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer and maximum 3 percent carbon black by weight of cement with

a Factory blend for full color saturation of mortar jointb Packaging for unitized jobsite mixing at ratio of 1 unit of color per sack of portland

cement

2 Grout Admixture

a Manufacturers One of the following or equal

1) Sika Corp Sika Grout Aid Type II2) Concrete Emulsions Grout Aid GA-II

3 Mortar Water Repellent Admixture

a Manufacturers must be the same manufacturer as CMU integral water repellant as specified in Section 04220 from one of the following or equal

1) WR Grace Dry Block Mortar2) Sika Corp Sikaproof 853) Master Builders Corp Omicron Mortar Proofing

4 Other Admixtures Prohibited unless accepted by the ENGINEER

E Water Clean clear potable free of oil soluble salts chemicals and other deleterious substances

22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

1 Mortar Mixing

a Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 270 Type S to meet performance requirements

b Mix in mechanical mixer and only in quantities needed for immediate usec Mix for minimum 3 minutes and maximum of 5 minutes after materials have been

added to mixer

2 Measurement for ingredients for mortar shall be either by volume or weight Measure by one of the following methods

a Measurement by Volume If ingredients are measured by volume measurement of sand shall be accomplished by the use of a container of known capacity

b Shovel count

3 Water shall be mixed with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the vertical surfaces of masonry units

a Use no mortar which has been standing for more than 1 hour after being mixedb Whenever 90 minutes has elapsed since last batch was mixed completely empty

mixer drum of materials and wash down before placing next batch of materials

B Grout Mixes

1 Grout Mixing

a Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 476 or in transit mixer to meet performance requirements with 8 to 10 inch slump

b Use within 90 minutes after addition of mixing waterc Mix for minimum of 5 minutes after ingredients are added and until uniform mix is

attained Grout shall have sufficient water added to produce pouring consistency without segregation

2 Mix grout with coarse aggregate for cavity walls with horizontal dimension of 2 inches or more and hollow cell masonry units with minimum 4-inch cell dimensions in both horizontal directions

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

A Install as specified in Section 04220

32 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Testing of Grout and Mortar

1 Grout and mortar mix proportions as prescribed by the ASTM standards identified in 105B above shall be verified in the presence of the ENGINEER using standardized volume containers for all materials including a box for sand The mix volumes shall be verified daily or as determined by ENGINEER

33 ADJUSTING

A Repair of Defective Masonry

1 Remove and replace or repair defective work2 Do not patch repair or cover defective work without inspection by the ENGINEER3 Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified for areas involved

304 - 310 (NOT USED)

No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04211- Page 1 of 9 Brick Masonry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 04211

BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section

102 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Face brick

2 Mortar and grout

3 Ties and anchors

4 Embedded flashing

5 Miscellaneous masonry accessories

103 ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data For each type of product indicated

A Shop Drawings For the following

1 Masonry Units Show sizes profiles coursing and locations of special shapes

2 Stone Trim Units Show sizes profiles and locations of each stone trim unit required

3 Fabricated Flashing Detail corner units end-dam units and other special applications

B Samples for Initial Selection

1 Face brick

2 Colored mortar

104 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A Material Certificates For each type and size of the following

1 Masonry units

a Include data on material properties substantiating compliance with requirements

b For brick include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances

c For exposed brick include test report for efflorescence according to

ASTM C 67

2 Cementitious materials Include brand type and name of manufacturer

3 Preblended dry mortar mixes Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients

4 Grout mixes Include description of type and proportions of ingredients

5 Anchors ties and metal accessories

9172018

A Mockup GC shall construct for review and approval of Owner a mockup of the exterior wall

of substation building not less than 4rsquo wide and 4rsquo high and including brick CMU backup and

representative examples of flashing weeps and other accessories Mockup shall include a

mockup of the CMU jamb condition at the overhead doors

Mockup shall be completed and presented to Owner at least two weeks prior to commencement

of masonry (brick or CMU) construction Should mockup be determined by Owner not to

comply with the intent of this specification mockup shall be revised and resubmitted for

approval

Upon approval by Owner the mockup shall serve as the standard against which completed

masonry work shall be evaluated for compliance with the requirements of the Contract

B Source Limitations for Masonry Units Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics from single source

from single manufacturer for each product required

C Source Limitations for Mortar Materials Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality

including color for exposed masonry from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate

D Masonry Standard Comply with ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602 unless modified by requirements

in the Contract Documents

106 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location If units are not stored in an

enclosed location cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting securely tied If units

become wet do not install until they are dry

B Delete first two paragraphs below if requiring Contractor to use a preblended dry mortar mix

C Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms under cover and in a dry location Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp

D Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided

E Always retain first paragraph below in case Contractor uses a preblended dry mortar mix

F Deliver preblended dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with

dispensing silos Store preblended dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms

under cover and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos

G Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil

9172018

A Protection of Masonry During construction cover tops of walls projections and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each days work Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress

1 Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold

cover securely in place

2 Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other

wythes secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to

unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place

B Stain Prevention Prevent grout mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted Immediately remove grout mortar and soil that come in contact with such

masonry

1 Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface

2 Protect sills ledges and projections from mortar droppings

3 Protect surfaces of window and door frames as well as similar products with painted

and integral finishes from mortar droppings

4 Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry

C Cold-Weather Requirements Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost Do not build on frozen substrates Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 5301ASCE 6TMS 602

1 Cold-Weather Cleaning Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried but not less

than seven days after completing cleaning

D Hot-Weather Requirements Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MASONRY UNITS GENERAL

A Defective Units Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips cracks or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard Do not use units

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work

202 BRICK

A Regional Materials Brick shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from

materials that have been extracted harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500

miles (800 km) of Project site

B General Provide shapes indicated and as follows with exposed surfaces matching finish and

color of exposed faces of adjacent units

9172018

1 For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed

surfaces finished

2 Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate

special conditions including those at corners movement joints bond beams sashes

and lintels

3 Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size form color and texture

on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing

4 Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result

in sawed surfaces being exposed to view

C Face Brick Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 or hollow brick complying with

ASTM C 652 Class H40V (void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional area)

1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide brick complying with the

following

2 Representative product

a Acceptable products include but are not necessarily limited to Denton Blend

105 Golden Sunset modular size ruff texture brick as manufactured by Acme

3 Grade SW

4 Type FBS

5 Initial Rate of Absorption Less than 30 g30 sq in (30 g194 sq cm) per minute when

tested per ASTM C 67

6 Efflorescence Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

not effloresced

203 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A Portland Cement ASTM C 150 Type I or II except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicat-

B Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207 Type S

C Portland Cement-Lime Mix Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150

Type I or Type III and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207

D Do not use Masonry Cement or Mortar Cement

E Aggregate for Mortar ASTM C 144 except for joints less than 14 inch (65 mm) thick use ag-

gregate graded with 100 percent passing the No 16 (118-mm) sieve

1 White-Mortar Aggregates Natural white sand or ground white stone

2 Colored-Mortar Aggregates Natural-colored sand or ground marble granite or other

sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color

F Aggregate for Grout ASTM C 404

G Mortar Pigments Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides compounded for use

in mortar mixes Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mor-

H Cold-Weather Admixture Nonchloride noncorrosive accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494 Type C and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of

composition indicated

9172018

I Water-Repellent Admixture Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with

concrete masonry units containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer

J Water Potable

K Available Mortar Products Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be in-

corporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following

1 Portland Lime Type N as manufactured by Alamo Cement

2 Color natural gray to match existing conditions adjacent

204 REINFORCEMENT

A Masonry Joint Reinforcement General ASTM A 951A 951M

205 TIES AND ANCHORS

A Materials Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated

1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire ASTM A 82A 82M with

ASTM A 153A 153M Class B-2 coating

2 Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M Commercial Steel G60 (Z180) zinc

coating

3 Steel Sheet Galvanized after Fabrication ASTM A 1008A 1008M Commercial Steel

with ASTM A 153A 153M Class B coating

B Anchor brick through rigid wall insulation with thermal wing-nut anchors equal to Type 304

Stainless Steel Hohmann amp Barnard Thermal 2-Seal Adjustable Veneer Anchors

C Wire Ties General Unless otherwise indicated size wire ties to extend at least halfway through

veneer but with at least 58-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face Outer ends of wires are bent 90

degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer

206 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A Compressible Filler Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056 Grade 2A1 com-

pressible up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated formulated from neoprene ure-

thane or PVC

B Bond-Breaker Strips Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226

Type I (No 15 asphalt felt)

207 MASONRY CLEANERS

A Proprietary Acidic Cleaner Manufacturers standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortargrout stains efflorescence and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned

9172018

208 MORTAR MIXES

A General Do not use admixtures including pigments air-entraining agents accelerators

retarders water-repellent agents antifreeze compounds or other admixtures unless otherwise

indicated

1 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar

2 Use Portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise

indicated

3 Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view regardless of weather conditions to ensure that mortar color is consistent

B Preblended Dry Mortar Mix Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site

C Mortar for Unit Masonry Comply with ASTM C 270 Proportion Specification Provide Type N

unless another type is indicated

D Pigmented Mortar Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other

ingredients to produce color required Do not add pigments to colored cement products

1 Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight

2 Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight

3 Mix to match Architects sample

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work

B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION GENERAL

A Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry After installing

equipment complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening

B Use full-size units without cutting if possible If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction cut units with motor-driven saws provide clean sharp

unchipped edges Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified Install cut

units with cut surfaces and where possible cut edges concealed

C Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures

1 Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed

D Matching Existing Masonry Match coursing bonding color and texture of brick masonry used

on existing buildings at the project site

9172018

E Wetting of Brick Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g30 sq in (30

g194 sq cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67 Allow units to absorb water so they are

damp but not wet at time of laying

303 TOLERANCES

A Dimensions and Locations of Elements

1 For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 12 inch (12

mm) or minus 14 inch (6 mm)

2 For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 12 inch (12 mm)

3 For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 14 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 12 inch (12 mm) total

B Lines and Levels

1 For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than

14 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum

2 For conspicuous horizontal lines such as lintels sills parapets and reveals do not

vary from level by more than 18 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) 14 inch in 20 feet (6

mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum

3 For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 14 inch in 10 feet

(6 mm in 3 m) 38 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum

4 For conspicuous vertical lines such as external corners door jambs reveals and

expansion and control joints do not vary from plumb by more than 18 inch in 10 feet

5 For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 14 inch in 10 feet (6 mm

in 3 m) 38 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m) or 12 inch (12 mm) maximum

6 For vertical alignment of exposed head joints do not vary from plumb by more than

7 For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 116 inch (15 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances

specified for warpage of units

C Joints

1 For bed joints do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 18

inch (3 mm) with a maximum thickness limited to 12 inch (12 mm) do not vary from

bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 18 inch (3 mm)

2 For exposed head joints do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or

3 For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond do not vary from a straight line

by more than 116 inch (15 mm) from one masonry unit to the next

304 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings movement-type joints returns and offsets

Avoid using less-than-half-size units particularly at corners jambs and where possible at

other locations

B Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry Unless otherwise indicated lay exposed masonry in

running bond do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face

dimensions at corners or jambs

9172018

C Stopping and Resuming Work Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in

course below do not tooth When resuming work clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar remove loose masonry units and mortar and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry

305 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A Lay hollow brick as follows

1 With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints

2 With entire units including areas under cells fully bedded in mortar at starting course

on footings

B Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head

joints

C Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated

306 REPAIRING POINTING AND CLEANING

A Remove and replace masonry units that are loose chipped broken stained or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units Install new units to match adjoining units install

in fresh mortar pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement

B Pointing During the tooling of joints enlarge voids and holes except weep holes and

completely fill with mortar Point up joints including corners openings and adjacent

construction to provide a neat uniform appearance Prepare joints for sealant application where

indicated

C In-Progress Cleaning Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar

fins and smears before tooling joints

D Final Cleaning After mortar is thoroughly set and cured clean exposed masonry as follows

1 Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels

2 Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes

3 Obtain Architects approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of

masonry

4 Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof

masking tape

5 Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water

6 Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical

Notes 20

7 Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturers

written instructions

8 Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable

to type of stain on exposed surfaces

9 Clean stone trim to comply with stone suppliers written instructions

9172018

10 Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILIs Indiana Limestone

Handbook

307 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A Salvageable Materials Unless otherwise indicated excess masonry materials are Contractors

property At completion of unit masonry work remove from Project site

B Waste Disposal as Fill Material Dispose of clean masonry waste including excess or soil-

contaminated sand waste mortar and broken masonry units by crushing and mixing with fill

material as fill is placed

1 Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension

2 Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section Earth Moving

3 Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade

C Excess Masonry Waste Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill as

described above and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owners property

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 04220 ndash Page 1 of 11 11619 Concrete Masonry Units Jose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 04220

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes Concrete masonry units and accessories

13 REFERENCES

1 C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 2 C 140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and

Related Units 3 C 426 - Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units

14 DEFINITIONS

A Standard Level of Quality High quality but conventional nearly free of chips cracks or other imperfections detracting from appearance when discernible and identified from distance of 20 feet under diffused lighting When level of quality is not specified Standard Level of Quality shall be assumed

A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data Submit manufacturerrsquos product data for block

B Samples Include samples of stretcher units in sufficient quantity to illustrate color range

C Test Reports

1 Compressive strength 2 Linear shrinkage 3 Moisture content as a percentage of total absorbtion 4 Total absorbtion 5 Unit weight

D Submit all required LEED documentation for mandatory and desirable credits noted in paragraph 105 per the submittal requirements outlined in Section 01352

a Certify recycled material content for recycled content products b Certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site

A Mock-Up

1 Prior to starting construction of masonry construct minimum 4 foot square mock-up 2 Use accepted materials containing each different kind and color of concrete masonry

units and water repellant to illustrate wall design 3 When not accepted construct another mock-up 4 When accepted mock-up will be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work 5 Upon completion of Project dispose of mock-ups in legal manner at offsite location in

accordance with Section 01505

B Pre-Installation Conference Conduct as specified in Section 01200

A Transport and handle concrete masonry units as required to prevent discoloration chipping and breakage

B Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location covered and protected from absorbing moisture Locate storage piles stacks and bins to protect materials from heavy traffic

C Remove chipped cracked and otherwise defective units from jobsite upon discovery

a In accordance with applicable building code provide adequate equipment for heating masonry materials when air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit

2 Hot Weather Requirements

a In accordance with applicable building code when ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour implement hot weather protection procedures

b Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used

c Do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of placing masonry units d Place masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar

B Sequencing and Scheduling

1 Order concrete masonry units well before start of installation to ensure adequate time for manufacturing and minimum 28 days for curing and drying before start of installation Protect from weather after curing period to avoid moisture increase

110 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units

1 Class Class 3 in accordance with ASTM C 90 Standard Level of Quality with minimum compressive strength of 1900 pounds per square inch

2 Surface Texture Standard and split face with dense faces suitable for painting where scheduled to be painted

3 Finish Color of block to be selected from the manufacturerrsquos full range of standard integral colors (subject to availability)

a Normal-weight aggregate standard (smooth) finish

4 Typical Size 8 or 12 inches wide by 8 inches high by 16 inches long unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or other sizes as needed to minimize cutting

5 Special Sizes and Shapes As required for window and door openings bond beams piers lintels control joints and other special applications to minimize cutting

6 Recycled Content Min 50 percent Pre-Consumer 7 Manufacturers One of the following or equal

a Featherlite Corp

B Anchor Bolts As specified in Section 05120

C Steel Reinforcement As specified in Section 04090

D Wall Ties As specified in Section 04090

E Wire Joint Reinforcement As specified in Section 04090

22 ACCESSORIES

A Control joint As specified in 04090

B Integral water repellant for all masonry units (added during manufacture) and in all mortar (added during mortar mixing) shall be ldquoDry-Block II Admixturerdquo by WR Grace Krete Industries or approved equal liquid polymeric admixture at rates as recommended by the manufacturer The same product shall be used in masonry units and in mortar

C Sealant Subsequent to erection all exposed surfaces of CMU shall be treated with a clear silanesiloxane penetrating sealant applied in accordance with manufacturerrsquos recommendations

1 Approved sealants include (but not limited to) a Prime-A-Pell 200 as manufactured by Tnemec Inc b Intraguard as manufactured by WR Meadows Inc

D Flashing for single-wythe CMU exterior As specified in 04090

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection

1 Protect adjacent construction with appropriate means from mortar droppings and other effects of laying of concrete masonry units

B Surface Preparation

1 Thoroughly clean foundations of laitance grease oil mud dirt mortar droppings and other matter that will reduce bond

32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores

1 Where Required Construct Forms to the Shapes indicated on the Drawings

a Construct forms sufficiently rigid to prevent deflection which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout

b Do not remove supporting forms or shores until the supported masonry has acquired sufficient strength to support safely its weight and any construction loads to which it may be subjected

1) Wait at least 24 hours after grouting masonry columns or walls before applying uniform loads

2 Wait at least 72 hours before applying concentrated loads

B Concrete Masonry Units

1 Provide Standard Level of Quality 2 Lay concrete masonry units dry 3 Lay units in uniform and true courses level plumb and without projections or offset of

adjacent units 4 Lay units to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled with grout or

insulation 5 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to maintain clear unobstructed continuous

vertical cell measuring not less than 2 by 3 inches 6 Place mortar with full coverage of joints at webs of all cells and face shells 7 Butter vertical head joints for thickness equal to face shell thickness of units and shove

joints tightly together so that mortar bonds to both masonry units 8 Solidly fill joints from face of units to inside face of cells 9 Lay units to desired height with joints of uniform thickness 10 Bond shall be plumb throughout 11 Lay units to avoid formation of cracks when units are placed Keep cells of units as free

of mortar as possible as masonry wall height increases 12 When positions of units shift after mortar has stiffened bond is broken or cracks are

formed relay units in new mortar 13 Remove mortar mortar droppings debris and other obstructions and materials from

inside of cell walls to receive grout or insulation 14 Seal cleanouts after inspection and before grouting or placing insulation

C Bond Pattern

1 Lay concrete masonry units in running bond pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings

D Foamed-In-Place Insulation

1 Where indicated on the Drawings fill concrete masonry unit cells of building exterior walls that are not to be filled with reinforcing and grout with foamed-in-place insulation

E Mortar Joints

1 Make joints straight clean smooth and uniform in thickness

2 Tool exposed joints slightly concave Strike concealed joints flush 3 Make vertical and horizontal joints 38 inch thick 4 Where fresh masonry joins totally or partially set masonry clean and roughen set

masonry before laying new units

F Wire Joint Reinforcement

1 Lap splice longitudinal wire joint reinforcement minimum 75 wire diameters 2 Place longitudinal wires in approximate centers of mortar beds with minimum 58-inch

mortar cover on exposed faces 3 Provide intersecting masonry walls with prefabricated wire joint reinforcement tees 4 Rake intersecting joints 12 inch and caulk joints

G Grouting and Reinforcement

1 Where horizontal and vertical bars are spliced and adjacent lap splices are separated by more than 3 inches the lap splice length shall be 72 bar diameters Where adjacent lap splices are separated by 3 inches or less the lap splice length shall be increased by 13 times or the lap splices shall be staggered at least 24 bar diameters with no increase in length

2 Hold vertical reinforcing bars in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters Use steel wire bar positioners to position bars Tie reinforcing bars to dowels with wire ties

3 Obtain acceptance of reinforcement placement before grouting 4 Unless specified on drawings fill spaces and cells containing reinforcing bars solidly

with grout

a Low-Lift Grouting

1) Hollow unit masonry to be grouted by the low lift method shall be constructed and grouted in lifts not exceeding 5 feet

2) Slushing with mortar will not be permitted

b High-Lift Grouting

1) If grouting is accomplished by the high-lift method double wythe masonry shall be allowed to cure at least 72 hours

2) Hollow unit masonry shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before grouting

3) In double wythe construction vertical grout barriers shall be built across the grout space to the height of the grout lift Grout barriers shall not be spaced more than 30 feet apart

4) Grout shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6 feet in depth 5) Each lift shall be allowed to set for 10 minutes after initial consolidation of

grout before successive lift is placed 6) The full height of each section of wall shall be grouted in one day

5 Grout in cells shall have full contact with surface of concrete footings 6 When grouting stops for one hour or longer form horizontal construction joints by

stopping grout placement 1-12 inches below top of uppermost unit containing grout

7 After placement consolidate grout using mechanical immersion vibrators designed for consolidating grout

8 Placement

a Use a hand bucket concrete hopper or grout pump b Place grout in final position within 1-12 hours after mixing Place grout so as to

completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates c Do not insert vibrators into lower grout placements that are in a semi-solidified

H Bond Beams

1 Place horizontal reinforcement and solidly grout bond beam units in place 2 Provide wire mesh at openings in bottom of bond beams to support grout where walls are

not grouted solid

I Cutting Concrete Masonry Units

1 When possible use full units of the proper size in lieu of cut units Cut units as required to form chases openings for anchorage and for other appurtenances

2 Cut and fit units with power-driven carborundum or diamond disc blade saw

J Control Joints

1 Provide in masonry walls at locations indicated on the Drawings 2 Make full height and continuous in appearance 3 Run bond beams and bond beam reinforcing bars continuously through control joints 4 Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed 5 Apply sealant as specified in Section 07900

K Openings and Lintels

1 Place horizontal reinforcement in fully grouted bond beam units 2 Use lintel block units where underside of lintel will be exposed 3 Provide minimum of 8-inch bearing at each end of lintel 4 Embed reinforcing bars minimum 24 inches or 48 bar diameters whichever is longer

into wall past edges of openings or as indicated on the Drawings

a At corners provide 90-degree bend with equivalent total embedment

L Steel Door Frames

1 Anchor and fully grout jambs and head of steel door frames connected to concrete unit masonry

2 Fill frames with grout as each 2 feet of concrete unit masonry is laid

M Bearing Plates

1 Provide minimum of 12 inches of grouted concrete unit masonry below steel bearing plates and beams bearing on masonry walls

N Anchor Bolts

1 Hold anchor bolts in place with template during grouting to assure precise alignment 2 Do not cut or ream members being anchored or use other means to accommodate

misaligned anchor bolts in roof deck support angles 3 Provide minimum 6-inch wide grouted concrete unit masonry entirely around anchor

bolts and other attachment devices

O Wall Ties

1 In composite or cavity 2 wythe walls bond masonry units together by embedding wall ties with a minimum of one per 4-12 square feet of wall area

2 Stagger ties in alternate courses with maximum vertical distance between ties at 18 inches on center and maximum horizontal distance between ties at 36 inches on center

P Enclosures

1 Where concrete masonry units enclose conduit pipes stacks ducts and similar items construct chases cavities and similar spaces as required whether or not such spaces are indicated on the Drawings

2 Point openings around flush mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar including flush joints above boxes

3 Do not cover enclosures until inspected and when appropriate tested

Q Other Embedded Items

1 Build in wall plugs accessories flashings pipe sleeves and other items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses

R Patching

1 Patch exposed concrete masonry units at completion of the Work and in such manner that patching will be indistinguishable from similar surroundings and adjoining construction

S Water Curing

1 Protect concrete masonry units from drying too rapidly by frequently fogging or sprinkling so walls will always be visibly damp for minimum 3 days

T Miscellaneous

1 Build in required items such as anchors flashings sleeves frames structural steel lintels anchor bolts and metal fabrications as required for complete installation

U External Water Repellent

1 Apply according to manufacturerrsquos recommendations

V Grouting Equipment

1 Grout Pumps

a Do not pump grout through aluminum tubes b Operate pumps to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets c Upon completion of each days pumping eject grout from pipeline without

contamination or segregation of the grout

1) Remove waste materials and debris from the equipment 2) Dispose of waste materials debris and all flushing water outside the

masonry

2 Vibrators

a Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 5000 impulses per minute when submerged in the grout

b Maintain at least 1 spare vibrator at the site at all times c Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible

effectiveness of the machine d Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation

without causing segregation

33 CONSTRUCTION

A Site Tolerances Lay masonry plumb true to line and with courses level Keep bond pattern plumb throughout Lay masonry within the following tolerances

1 Maximum variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns walls and in the flutes and surfaces of fluted or split faced blocks

a In Adjacent Masonry Units 18 inch b In 10 Feet 14 inch c In Any Story or 20 Feet maximum 38 inch d In 40 Feet or More 12 inch

2 Maximum variations from the plumb for external corners expansion joints and other conspicuous lines

a In Any Story or 20 Feet Maximum 14 inch b In 40 Feet or More 12 inch

3 Maximum variations from the level or grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels sills parapets horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines

a In Any Bay or 20 Feet Maximum 14 inch b In 40 Feet or more 12 inch

4 Maximum variations of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns walls and partitions

a In Any Bay or 20 Feet Maximum 12 inch

b In 40 Feet or More 34 inch

5 Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls

a Minus 14 inch b Plus 12 inch

A Site Tests

1 OWNER will have tests performed by an independent laboratory 2 Have minimum 3 concrete masonry units of each type proposed for Project tested in

accordance with ASTM C 90 C 140 and C 426 to verify conformance to Specifications 3 Tests shall include compressive strength linear shrinkage moisture content as percent of

total absorption total absorption and unit weight

B Special Inspection

1 OWNER will employ a qualified masonry special inspector for continuous special inspection of the masonry work Acceptance by a State or municipality having a program of examining and certifying masonry inspectors will be considered adequate qualifications The masonry inspector shall be at the site during all masonry construction and perform the following duties

a Review Drawings and Specifications and meet with the CONTRACTOR to discuss requirements before work commences

b Before masonry work commences CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTORs Quality Control Representative shall attend meeting with ENGINEER to review the requirements for surveillance and quality control of the masonry work

c Check brand and type of cement lime (if used) and source of sand d Verify that foundation is clean rough and ready to receive units e Check reinforcing steel dowels for correct location straightness proper alignment

spacing size and length f Observe field proportioning of mortar Visually check aggregate to determine

uniformity of grading cleanliness and moisture g Verify that joints are full of mortar and kept tight during work Inspect grout cells

to verify that fins will not interfere with grouting Verify that masons keep grout cells clean of mortar droppings and inspect to determine compliance

h Continuously observe placing of grout i Perform or supervise performance of required sampling and testing

2 Keep complete record of inspections Report daily to the Building Official CONTRACTORs Quality Control Representative ENGINEER and OWNER the progress of the masonry inspection

35 CLEANING

A Exercise extreme care to prevent mortar splotches

B Do not attach construction supports to concrete masonry walls

C Wash off concrete scum and grout spills before scum and grout set

D Remove grout stains from walls

E Clean exposed masonry Remove scaffolding and equipment Dispose of debris refuse and surplus material offsite legally

F Remove efflorescence on exposed surfaces with commercially prepared cleaning solution acceptable to masonry unit manufacturer

1 Apply cleaning solution in accordance with cleaning solution manufacturers printed instructions

2 Do not use muriatic acid as cleaning solution 3 Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment

36 PROTECTION

A Provide temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to damage

B Bracing

1 Unless wall is adequately supported by permanent supporting elements so wall will not overturn or collapse adequately brace masonry walls over 8 feet in height to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse

2 Keep bracing in place until permanent supporting elements of structure are in place

C Limited Access Zone

1 Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction 2 Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed

plus 4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall 3 Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall Do not permit

other persons to enter zone 4 Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting

elements to prevent overturning and collapse

307 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05120 ndash Page 1 of 5 41018 Structural SteelJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Structural steel2 Grout

12 DEFINITIONS

A Structural Steel Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

A Product Data For each type of product

B Shop Drawings Show fabrication of structural-steel components

A Welding certificates

B Mill test reports for structural steel including chemical and physical properties

C Source quality-control reports

A Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D11D11M Structural Welding Code - Steel

B Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents

1 AISC 3032 AISC 3603 RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A W-Shapes ASTM A 992A 992M

B Channels Angles S-Shapes ASTM A 36A 36M

C Plate and Bar ASTM A 36A 36M

D Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections ASTM A 500A 500M Grade B structural tubing

E Steel Pipe ASTM A 53A 53M Type E or Type S Grade B

F Welding Electrodes Comply with AWS requirements

22 BOLTS CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS

A High-Strength Bolts Nuts and Washers ASTM A 325 Type 1 heavy-hex steel structural bolts ASTM A 563 Grade C heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts and ASTM F 436 Type 1 hardened carbon-steel washers all with plain finish

B Threaded Rods ASTM A 36A 36M

1 Finish Hot-dip zinc coating ASTM A 153A 153M Class C

23 PRIMER

A Primer Fabricators standard lead- and chromate-free non-asphaltic rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI79 and compatible with topcoat

24 GROUT

A Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout ASTM C 1107C 1107M factory-packaged nonmetallic aggregate grout noncorrosive and non-staining mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time

25 FABRICATION

A Structural Steel Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible Fabricate according to AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and to AISC 360

26 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A High-Strength Bolts Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint specified

1 Joint Type Snug tightened

B Weld Connections Comply with AWS D11D11M for tolerances appearances welding procedure specifications weld quality and methods used in correcting welding work

27 SHOP PRIMING

A Shop prime steel surfaces except the following

1 Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches

2 Surfaces to be field welded3 Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing)4 Galvanized surfaces5 Surfaces enclosed in interior construction

B Surface Preparation Clean surfaces to be painted Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter slag or flux deposits Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards

1 SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning2 SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

C Priming Immediately after surface preparation apply primer according to manufacturers written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mils Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints corners edges and exposed surfaces

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

A Verify with certified steel erector present elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods bearing plates and other embedment elements for compliance with requirements

32 ERECTION

A Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360

B Baseplates and Bearing Plates Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates Clean bottom surface of plates

1 Set plates for structural members on wedges shims or setting nuts as required2 Weld plate washers to top of baseplate3 Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed

Do not remove wedges or shims but if protruding cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout

4 Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain Neatly finish exposed surfaces protect grout and allow to cure Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts

C Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

33 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A High-Strength Bolts Install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint specified

1 Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing alignment adequacy of temporary connections and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds

A Testing Agency Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections

B Bolted Connections Inspect bolted connections according to RCSCs Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts

C Welded Connections Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D11D11M

1 In addition to visual inspection test and inspect field welds according to AWS D11D11M and the following inspection procedures at testing agencys option

a Liquid Penetrant Inspection ASTM E 165b Magnetic Particle Inspection ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on

finished weld Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted

c Ultrasonic Inspection ASTM E 164d Radiographic Inspection ASTM E 94

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05210 ndash Page 1 of 3 41018 Steel JoistsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Gable steel joists2 K-series steel joist substitutes3 Joist accessories

A Product Data For each type of joist accessory and product

B Shop Drawings

1 Include layout designation number type location and spacing of joists2 Include joining and anchorage details bracing bridging and joist accessories splice and

connection locations and details and attachments to other construction

B Manufacturer certificates

A Manufacturer Qualifications A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJIs Specifications

1 Manufacturers responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements

B Welding Qualifications Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D11D11M Structural Welding Code - Steel

A Deliver store and handle joists as recommended in SJIs Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A Steel Joist Substitutes Manufacture according to Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists K-Series in SJIs Specifications with steel-angle or -channel members

22 GABLE STEEL JOISTS

A Manufacture steel joists according to Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists DLH-Series in SJIs Specifications with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated

23 PRIMERS

A Primer SSPC-Paint 15 or manufacturers standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15

24 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A Bridging Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of diagonal bridging of material size and type required by SJIs Specifications for type of joist chord size spacing and span Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability

B Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly

25 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A Clean and remove loose scale heavy rust and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories

B Apply one coat of shop primer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

A Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured

B Install joists and accessories plumb square and true to line securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJIs Specifications joist manufacturers written recommendations and requirements in this Section

1 Before installation splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece2 Space adjust and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening3 Install temporary bracing and erection bridging connections and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction

C Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work

D Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection before construction loads are applied Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams

A Testing Agency Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05310 ndash Page 1 of 4 41018 Steel DeckJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 05310

STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Roof deck

A Product Data For each type of deck accessory and product indicated

B Shop Drawings

1 Include layout and types of deck panels anchorage details reinforcing channels pans cut deck openings special jointing accessories and attachments to other construction

B Product certificates

C Evaluation reports

A Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D13 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

A Protect steel deck from corrosion deformation and other damage during delivery storage and handling

B Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A AISI Specifications Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISIs North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

22 ROOF DECK

A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following

1 CMC Joist amp Deck2 Consolidated Systems Inc Metal Dek Group3 Nucor Corp Vulcraft Group4 Verco Manufacturing Co5 Wheeling Corrugating Company Div of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation

B Roof Deck Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening grooves to comply with SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck in SDI Publication No 31 and with the following

1 Galvanized-Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33 G60 zinc coating

2 Deck Profile Type IR intermediate rib3 Profile Depth 1-12 inches4 Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness 00358 inch5 Span Condition Triple span or more6 Side Laps Overlapped

23 ACCESSORIES

A General Provide manufacturers standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated

B Mechanical Fasteners Corrosion-resistant low-velocity power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners or self-drilling self-threading screws

C Side-Lap Fasteners Corrosion-resistant hexagonal washer head self-drilling carbon-steel screws No 10 minimum diameter

D Flexible Closure Strips Vulcanized closed-cell synthetic rubber

E Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories Steel sheet minimum yield strength of 33000 psi not less than 00359-inch design uncoated thickness of same material and finish as deck of profile indicated or required for application

F Galvanizing Repair Paint ASTM A 780

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

A Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance

A Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No 31 manufacturers written instructions and requirements in this Section

B Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks

C Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection

D Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck

E Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength continuity of deck and support of other work

F Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding appearance and quality of welds and methods used for correcting welding work

G Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturers written instructions

H Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories Install ridge and valley plates finish strips end closures and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturers written instructions Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation

1 Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated

33 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-12 inches long and as follows

1 Weld Diameter 58 inch nominal2 Weld Spacing Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds

per deck unit at each support Space welds 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28

B Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 12 of the span or 18 inches and as follows

1 Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No 10 diameter or larger carbon-steel screws2 Fasten with a minimum of 1-12-inch-long welds

C End Bearing Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-12 inches with end joints as follows

1 End Joints Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractors option

D Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories Install ridge and valley plates finish strips end closures and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturers written instructions Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation

E Flexible Closure Strips Install flexible closure strips over partitions walls and where indicated Install with adhesive according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure complete closure

B Field welds will be subject to inspection Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer

C Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements

D Additional inspecting at Contractors expense will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements

35 PROTECTION

A Galvanizing Repairs Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturers written instructions

END OF SECTION

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 05500 ndash Page 1 of 10 41018 Metal FabricationsJose I Guerra Inc TBPE Firm F-3

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Metal grating stair tread2 Aluminum stair nosing3 Concrete inserts4 Ladders5 Metal gratings6 Metal tread plate7 Preformed channel pipe supports8 Stairs9 Miscellaneous metals10 Associated accessories to the above items

B It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the CONTRACTORrsquos Work

13 REFERENCES

The publications listed below for a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only

A Aluminum Association (AA)

1 Specification M12-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes

B American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1 Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

C American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1 A 36A 36M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel2 A 48 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings3 A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe Steel Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless4 A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products5 A 240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels6 A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service7 A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes8 A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60000 PSI Tensile

Strength9 A 325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints10 A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes11 A 490 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts 150 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength12 A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes13 A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing14 A 569 - Standard Specification for Steel Carbon (015 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled

Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality15 A 570A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Carbon Hot-Rolled

Structural Quality16 A 635A 635M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Heavy-Thickness

Coils Carbon Hot-Rolled17 A 653A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process18 [A 992A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes]19 B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate20 B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars

Rods Wire Profiles and Tubes21 B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural

Profiles22 B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube23 F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts Hex Cap Screws and Studs

D American Welding Society (AWS)

1 Standard Symbols for Welding Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

E National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

1 Metal Finishes Manual

F Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

1 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Labor Pt 1900-1990

14 - 15 (NOT USED)

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

1 Metal grating stair tread2 Aluminum stair nosing3 Metal grating

B Shop Drawings

1 Ladders2 Metal grating3 Metal tread plate4 Stairs5 Miscellaneous metals

C Quality Control Submittals

1 Design data and calculations Stairs and ladders to include drawings and calculations signed and sealed by ENGINEER registered in the State of Texas

2 Test Reports

a Gratings

1) Grating manufacturers calculations showing that gratings will meet specified design load stress and deflection requirements for each size grating for each span

2) Reports of tests performed

17 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)

22 MATERIALS

A General Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings structural and miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the ASTM including the following

ItemASTMStandard No

Class GradeType or Alloy No

Cast IronCast Iron A 48 Class 40BSteelGalvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90Black steel sheet or strip A 569

A 570--

Coil (plate) A 635 --Structural plate bars rolled shapes and miscellaneous items (except W shapes)

A 36 --

Rolled W shapes A 992 Grade 50Standard bolts nuts and washers A 307 --High strength bolts nuts and hardened flat washers

A 325A 490

Eyebolts A 489 Type 1Tubing cold-formed A 500 --Tubing hot-formed A 501 --Steel pipe A 53 Grade BStainless steelPlate sheet and strip A 240 Type 304 or 316Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304 or 316Bolts (Type 304) F593 Group 1 Condition CWBolts (Type 316) F593 Group 2 Condition CWAluminumFlashing sheet aluminum B 209 Alloy 5005-H14

0032 inches minimum thickness

Structural sheet aluminum- B 209 Alloy 6061-T6Structural aluminum B 209

B 308Alloy 6061-T6

Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42 Use Type 304L if material will be welded Use Type 316L if material will be welded

1 Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM2 Where stainless steel is welded use low-carbon stainless steel

A Metal Grating Stair Tread

1 Material Welded steel grating tread with non-slip nosing and integral end plates for bolt on attachment to stair stringers Manufactured and galvanized per subsection 203E3below

2 Size

a Tread Width To equal tread spacing plus 1 inch minimumb Tread Length Length to suit stringer to stringer dimension indicated on the

Drawingsc Depth 1-34 inches

3 Bolts Type 304 stainless steel

B Aluminum Stair Nosing

1 Manufacturers One of the following or equal

a Wooster Products Inc Type 101 Nosingb American Safety Tread Co Inc Style 801 Nosing

2 Material Cast aluminum abrasive nosings with aluminum oxide granules integrally cast into metal forming permanent nonslip long-wearing surface

3 For installation in cast-in-place stairs4 Configuration 4 inches wide fabricated with integrally cast stainless steel anchors at

approximately 12-inch centers Length to extend within 3 inches of stair edge on each side

C Concrete Inserts

1 Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in Section 15061

D Ladders

1 General

a Type Safety type conforming to local State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards as minimum Furnish guards for ladder wells

b Size 18 inches wide between side rails of length size shape detail and location indicated on the Drawings

2 Metal Ladders

a Materials 6063-T5 aluminum alloy except where submerged or where specifically called for Type 304L stainless steel

b Rungs

1) Corrugated dimpled skid-resistance and shaped to prevent slipping off the end of rung

2) Capable of withstanding 1000-pound load without failure

c Side Rails Minimum 4-inch by 12-inch flat barsd Fabrication

1) Welded construction of size shape location and details indicated on the Drawings

2) For ladders over 20 feet high fall prevention system designed in accordance with State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements

e Fall Prevention System Include but not limit to railing brackets clamps 2 sleeves and 2 belts satisfying Occupational Safety and Health Administration safe climbing requirements

1) Manufacturers One of the following or equal

a) North Consumer Products Saf-T-Climb

E Metal Gratings

1 General

a Fabricate grating to cover areas indicated on the Drawingsb Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings grating over an opening shall cover

entire openingc Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or protrusion

including valve operators or stems and gate framesd Band Ends of Grating and Edges of Cutouts in Grating

1) End Banding 14 inch less than height of grating with top of grating and top edge of banding flush

2) Cutout Banding Full-height of grating3) Use banding of same material as grating4) Panel Layout Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating around

protrusions or piping5) Openings 6 Inches and Larger Lay out grating panels with edges of

2 adjacent panels located on centerline of opening6) Openings smaller than 6 Inches Locate opening at edge of single panel7) Where an area requires more than 1 grating section to cover area clamp

adjacent grating sections together at 14-points with fasteners acceptable to ENGINEER

8) Fabricate grating in units of maximum 50 pounds each

e When requested by ENGINEER test 1 section of each size grating for each span length involved on the job under full load

1) Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections

f Grating shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings

2 Aluminum Grating

a Material for Gratings Shelf Angles and Rebates 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy except cross bars may be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy

b Shelf Angle Concrete Anchors Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steelc Grating Rebate Rod Anchors 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloyd Bar Size and Spacing As determined by manufacturer to enable grating to support

design loade Design Live Load A minimum of 150 pounds per square foot uniform live load on

entire grating area but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where grating is located

f Maximum Fiber Stress for Design Load 12000 pounds per square inchg Maximum Deflection Due to Design Load 1240 of grating clear spanh Maximum Spacing of Main Grating Bars 1-18 inches clear between barsi Minimum Grating Height 1-12 inchesj Manufacturers One of the following or equal

1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc grooved I-Bar

3 Steel Gratings

a Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123b Bar Size and Spacing Shall meet NAAMM of W-19-4 (1rdquox 316rdquo) and as

determined by the manufacturer to support design loadc Design Live Load A minimum of 150 pounds per square foot uniform live load on

the entire area of the grating area but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where the grating is located

d Maximum Fiber Stress for Design Load 18000 pounds per square inche Maximum Deflection Under Design Load 1240 of grating clear spanf Bar Spacing Maximum of 1-18 inches clear between barsg Manufacturers One of the following or equal

1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries IKG Weldforged3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc Type 19W4

4 Heavy-Duty Steel Grating

a Heavy-duty type fabricated from structural steel and designed in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges using HS-20 loading

b Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123c Manufacturers One of the following or equal

1) McNichols Company2) IKG Borden Industries Heavy Duty Steel Grating3) Seidelhuber Metal Products Inc equivalent product

F Metal Tread Plate

1 Plate having a raised figured pattern on 1 surface to provide improved traction

G Preformed Channel Pipe Supports

1 Preformed channel pipe supports for pipe supports and other applications are specified in Section 15066

H Stairs

1 Steel Stairs

a Ships ladders shall conform to local State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards as minimum

b Design of Metal Stairs is specified in Section 05511c Stringers Structural steel channels or platesd Treads See 203A abovee Railings Aluminum per Section 05520f Anchors Welded or bolted brackets designed for support and anchorage at top and

bottomg Finish Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123

I Miscellaneous Metal

1 Miscellaneous Aluminum Fabricate aluminum products not covered separately herein in accordance with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting Do not weld or flame cut

2 Miscellaneous Cast Iron

a General

1) Tough gray iron free from cracks holes swells and cold shuts2) Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge

of casting without flaking metal3) Before leaving the foundry clean castings and apply 16-mil dry film

thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings

3 Miscellaneous Stainless Steel

a Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade

4 Miscellaneous Structural Steel

a Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

A Verification of Conditions Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the work of this Section If unsatisfactory conditions exist do not begin this work until such conditions have been corrected

32 INSTALLATION

A General Install products as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturers printed instructions as applicable except where specified otherwise

1 Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs including top tread on upper concrete slab

2 Omit stair nosings where concrete is submerged3 Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in Section 099024 Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete flush with tread and riser faces Install nosing in

center of step approximately 3 inches from each stair edge

C Ladders

1 Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches between supporting surface and center of rungs

2 Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung extend side rails 3 feet 3 inches minimum above landing and return the rails with a radius bend to the landing

3 Where exit from ladder is to side extend ladder 5 feet 6 inches minimum above landing and rigidly secure at top

4 Erect rail straight level plumb and true to position indicated on the Drawings Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye

D Metal Gratings

1 General

a Allow 18-inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of shelf angles

b Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2 inches minimumc Install metal plate or angles where necessary to fill openings at changes in

elevation and at openings between equipment and gratingd Install angle stops at ends of gratinge Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off supportf Weld stops in place unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawingsg Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same plane

2 Aluminum Grating

a Coat surfaces of aluminum shelf angles rebates and rod anchors in contact with concrete as specified in Section 09902

b Aluminum Grating Support on aluminum shelf angles or rebates

3 Steel Grating

a Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel shelf angles or rebates

a Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel rebates embedded and anchored in concrete

b Use for roadways traffic areas and where indicated on the Drawings

E Stairs

1 General

a Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or specified

33 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 06100- Page 1 of 3 Rough Carpentry MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section

102 SUMMARY

A This Section includes the following

1 Wood furring grounds nailers and blocking

103 SUBMITTALS

A General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi-

sion 1 Specification Sections

B Product Data for the following products

1 Metal framing anchors

2 Construction adhesives

A Retain below where applicable normally delete if species and grade are indicated for each use

B Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the

American Lumber Standards Committees (ALSC) Board of Review

C Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicat-

D Insert specific model code organization below or revise if report must be from another source

E Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction that evidence the following products compliance with building code in effect for

Project

2 Power-driven fasteners

3 Fire-retardant-treated wood

A Keep materials under cover and dry Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfac-

es Stack lumber plywood and other panels Provide for air circulation within and around

stacks and under temporary coverings

1 For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals place spacers

between each bundle to provide air circulation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

A Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following

1 Metal Framing Anchors

9172018

a Cleveland Steel Specialty Co

b Harlen Metal Products Inc

c Silver Metal Products Inc

d Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc

e Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co Inc

202 LUMBER GENERAL

A Lumber Standards Comply with DOC PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard and

with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSCs Board of Review

B Grade Stamps Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency

grade species moisture content at time of surfacing and mill

C Where nominal sizes are indicated provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified Where actual sizes are indicated they are minimum dressed sizes for dry

lumber

1 Provide dressed lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated

2 Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-

inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less unless otherwise indicated

203 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED LUMBER

A General Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated use materials complying with

requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency

B Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84 and with no evidence of

significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes and with

the flame front not extending more than 105 feet (32 m) beyond the centerline of the burners

at any time during the test

1 Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners

2 Exterior Type Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected

to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898 Use for exterior locations

and where indicated

C Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent Do not use

matrial that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material

D Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review

E Application Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated specifically including

1 Wood cants nailers curbs equipment support bases blocking stripping and similar

members in connection with roofing flashing vapor barriers and waterproofing

204 FASTENERS

A General Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this Article for material and manufacture

1 All fasteners and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel

B Nails Wire Brads and Staples FS FF-N-105

C Below covers power-driven staples nails P-nails and allied fasteners

D Power-Driven Fasteners CABO NER-272

9172018

E Wood Screws ASME B1861

F Lag Bolts ASME B1821 (ASME B18238M)

G High-Strength Bolts Nuts amp Washers ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) Type 1 heavy hex steel

structural bolts heavy hex carbon-steel nuts and hardened carbon-steel washers

205 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A General Provide galvanized steel hangers and framing anchors of structural capacity type and

size indicated and as recommended by the manufacturer for each use

B Galvanized Steel Sheet Hot-dip zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 G60

(ASTM A 653M Z180) coating designation structural commercial or lock-forming quality

as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement

B Set carpentry to required levels and lines with members plumb true to line cut and fitted

C Fit carpentry to other construction scribe and cope as required for accurate fit Correlate loca-

tion of furring nailers blocking grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other

construction

D Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber

and plywood

E Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated complying

with the following

1 NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners

2 Table 230491 Fastening Schedule in ICCs International Building Code

F Revise below to include other kinds of nails if required

G Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials

Make tight connections between members Install fasteners without splitting wood predrill as

required

H Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails

302 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL

A Framing Standard Comply with UBC standards for structural framing unless otherwise indicat-

B Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated

C Do not splice structural members between supports

303 PROTECTION

A Protect rough carpentry from weather

END OF SECTION

822018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07130- Page 1 of 2 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07130

UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER

PART 1 ndash GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Products supplied under this section

1 Vapor barrier and installation accessories for installation under concrete slabs

12 REFERENCES

1 ASTM E1745-17 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Con-

tact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

2 ASTM E1643-11 Selection Design Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retard-

ers Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B Technical Reference - American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1 ACI 3022R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials

2 ACI 3021R-15 Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction

13 SUBMITTALS

A Quality controlassurance

1 Summary of test results per paragraph 93 of ASTM E1745

2 Manufacturerrsquos samples and literature

3 Manufacturerrsquos installation instructions for placement seaming penetration prevention

and repair and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643

4 All mandatory ASTM E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll per

ASTM E1745 Section 81

PART 2 ndash PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

A Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities

1 Maintain permeance of less than 001 Perms [grains(ft2 hr inHg)] as tested in accordance

with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 71 (711-715)

2 Other performance criteria

a Strength ASTM E1745 Class A

b Thickness 15 mils minimum

3 Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll

per ASTM E1745 Section 81

B Vapor barrier products

1 Acceptable products include but are not necessarily limited to

a Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC (877) 464-7834

wwwstegoindustriescom

22 ACCESSORIES

A Seams

822018

1 Seam tape explicitly identified as compatible with vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and

installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written instructions

B Sealing Penetrations of Vapor barrier

1 Seam tape and mastic explicitly identified as compatible with vapor barrier by barrier manu-

facturer and installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written instructions

C Perimeteredge seal

1 Tack tape termination bars and other components explicitly identified as compatible with

vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufacturerrsquos written

instructions

D Accessories

1 Where special conditions require for example penetration prevention measures and screeds

for use with interior forms utilize accessories and components explicitly identified as compat-

ible with vapor barrier by barrier manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufactur-

errsquos written instructions

PART 3 ndash EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer

1 Level and compact base material

32 INSTALLATION

A Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643

1 Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete

placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever

possible

2 Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab If practicable terminate it at the top of

the slab otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where ob-

structed by impediments such as dowels waterstops or any other site condition requir-

ing early termination of the vapor barrier At the point of termination seal vapor barrier

to the foundation wall grade beam or slab itself

3 Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturerrsquos seam tape

4 Apply seam tapeCrete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier

5 Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturerrsquos instructions

6 For interior forming applications avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through

vapor barrier Use blunt-end andor threaded nail stakes (screed pad posts) and insert

them into Beast Foot Ensure Beast Footrsquos peel-and-stick adhesive base is fully adhered

to the vapor barrier

7 If non-permanent stakes must be driven through vapor retarder repair as recommended

by vapor retarder manufacturer

8 Use reinforcing bar supports with base sections that eliminate or minimize the potential

for puncture of the vapor barrier

9 Repair damaged areas with vapor barrier material of similar (or better) permeance punc-

ture and tensile

10 For vapor barrier-safe concrete screeding applications install Beast Screed (vapor barri-

er-safe screed system) per manufacturerrsquos instructions prior to placing concrete

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07210- Page 1 of 2 Building Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A Rigid board type wall insulation(s) for thermal protection in wall assemblies

102 REFERENCES

A Refer to specific products for applicable standards and specifications of the following organiza-

tions agencies

1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

2 Federal Specifications (FS)

3 Factory Mutual (FM)

103 SUBMITTALS

A Comply with submittal procedures specified in Section 01330

B Product data Manufacturerrsquos specifications and installation instructions for polyiso foam core in-

sulation board and fasteners

C Samples

1 Submit 5 inch x 9 inch sample(s) of each board type required

2 Submit sample(s) of each fastener type required

D Certificates Manufacturerrsquos certification that materials meet specification requirements

A Regulatory Requirements

A Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01650

B Deliver insulation in packages labeled with material name thermal value and product code

C When stored outdoors stack insulation on pallets above ground and cover with tarpaulin or other

suitable waterproof coverings Slit or remove manufactureracutes packaging before covering with the

jobsite waterproof covering to prevent condensation accumulation

A Comply with building code andor insurance underwriterrsquos requirements applicable for products of

this Section

B Do not install insulation when insulation and or framing is wet

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

A Provide foil-faced polyiso insulating sheathing products as manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corpo-

ration 2000 River Edge Parkway Ste 800 Atlanta GA 30328 Ph (770) 952-1442 Fax (770)

952-3170

202 MATERIALS

A Basis of Design

1 Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core manufactured using patented non-ozone deplet-

ing hydrocarbon blowing technology ASTM C1289 Type I Class 1

B Insulation Long-Term ldquoRrdquo Value Determined in accordance with CANULC-S770LTTR

203 FASTENERS

A Basis of Design

1 Secure all rigid wall insulation with thermal wing-nut anchors equal to Type 304 Stain-

less Steel Hohmann amp Barnard Thermal 2-Seal Adjustable Veneer Anchors

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing framing surfaces

302 APPLICATION INSTALLATION

A Install specified wall insulation panels using approved mechanical fasteners in accordance with

manufacturerrsquos latest written instructions and building codes

B Install with tight board to board joints to assure proper edge contact and thermal performance

C Install approved peel and stick min 4rdquo wide tape at all junctures of the foam panels and at all

penetrations

303 CLEANING PROTECTION

A Remove trash and construction debris from insulation and or framing surfaces prior to applica-

B Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather for more than 60 days after installation

1 Remove and replace installed insulation that has become damaged with new insulation

2 Allow insulation surface to air dry prior to installing the wall cladding

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07220- Page 1 of 3 Roof Insulation MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07220

ROOF INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

A HCFC FREE Polyiso Rigid board type roof insulation(s) for thermal protection as part of roofing as-

semblies

102 RELATED SECTIONS

A Section 05 30 00 - Metal Decking

B Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Roof blocking and nailers

103 REFERENCES

A ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board

B ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

C ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

D FM 4450 - Approval Standard - Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks

E FM 4470 - Approval Standard - Class I Roof Covers

F LTTR ndash Long Term Thermal Resistancepredicted by CANULC-S770-03

G UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

H UL 790 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

I UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions

104 DEFINITIONS

A LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) is defined as using techniques from ASTM C1303 or

CANULC-S770 the predicted R-Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average performance

of a permeably faced foam insulation product over 15 years LTTR applies to ALL foam insulation prod-

ucts with blowing agents other than air such as polyiso extruded polystyrene and polyurethane The new

method is based on consensus standards in the US and Canada

105 SUBMITTALS

A Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 and 01 60 00

B Product Data

1 Manufactureracutes specifications

2 Installation instructions for insulation board and fasteners

3 Product Data as per ASTM 2129 ndash 01 Standard for Data Collection for Sustainability Assess-

ment of Building Products

C Samples

462018

1 Submit 6 by 6 inch (152 by 152 mm) samples of each board type required

2 Submit samples of each fastener type required

D Shop Drawings Roof plan showing layout of boards and fastening patterns

E Certificates System Manufactureracutes or insulation manufacturerrsquos certification that the insulation meets

Zero ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and Zero GWP (Global Warming Potential) specification require-

F Thermal Warranty Submit sample warranty indicating conditions and limitations

3 Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) Classification

4 IBC BOCA ICBO and SBCCI Sections on Foam Plastic Insulation

A Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01 65 00

C When stored outdoors stack insulation on pallets above ground or roof deck and cover with tarpaulin or

other suitable waterproof coverings Slit or remove manufactureracutes packaging before covering with water-

proof covering

A Comply with insurance underwriteracutes requirements applicable for products of this Section

B Do not install insulation on roof deck when water of any type is present Do not apply roofing materials

when substrate is damp or wet

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

A Acceptable Manufacturers Atlas Roofing Corporation

B Provide polyiso roof board insulation from a single manufacturer

202 MATERIALS

A Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Provide products that comply with the following

1 ASTM standards specified

2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) classifications specified

3 ICBO Uniform Building Code Section on Foam Plastic Insulation

B Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Closed-cell HCFC FREE ldquoGreenrdquo polyisocyanurate foam core integrally

laminated to heavy non- asphaltic fiber-reinforced felt facers FM 1-90 wind uplift classification compres-

sive strength - 20 psi

462018

C Nailable Polyiso Roof Board Insulation Closed-cell HCFC FREE ldquoGreenrdquo polyisocyanurate foam board

bonded to 716 inch thick APATECO rated OSB on the top side and a fiber-reinforced felt facer on the

bottom for use with metal roofing FM 1-90 wind rating compressive strength - 20 psi

D LTTR - Insulation R Value Long-term thermal resistance values of the foam were determined in ac-

cordance with CANULC-S770 All test samples were third-party selected and tested by an accredited ma-

terials testing laboratory

D Related Materials

1 Fasteners Factory Mutual approved

2 Fasteners For nailable insulation per insulation manufacturers standards

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation Verify that substrate is dry clean and free of for-

eign material that will damage insulation or impede installation

B Verify that roof drains scuppers roof curbs nailers equipment supports vents and other roof accesso-

ries are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and submittals

C Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers materials and equipment without damaging or

deforming work

1 Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing deck surfaces

A Install specified insulation using approved mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufactureracutes lat-

est written instructions and as required by governing codes and Owneracutes insurance carrier

B Install with end joints staggered to avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck In mul-

ti-layer installations stagger joints in top and bottom layers

A Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing membrane

B Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather Cover and waterproof with completed roof system

immediately after installation

1 Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day

2 Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or damaged with new insulation

C Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective covering materials during and

after installation

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07411- Page 1 of 10 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07411

STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section

12 SUMMARY

A Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels

13 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A Preinstallation Conference Conduct conference at Project site

1 Meet with Owner Architect Owners insurer if applicable metal panel Installer metal panel

manufacturers representative structural-support Installer and installers whose work interfaces

with or affects metal panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment

2 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials Installers

personnel equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays

3 Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation including manufacturers

4 Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements including alignment between and

attachment to structural members

5 Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing

6 Review flashings special details drainage penetrations equipment curbs and condition of other

construction that affect metal panels

7 Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance certificates and tests and

inspections if applicable

8 Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation

9 Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation

10 Document proceedings including corrective measures and actions required and furnish copy of

record to each participant

1 Include construction details material descriptions dimensions of individual components and

profiles and finishes for each type of panel and accessory

B Sustainable Design Submittals

1 Product Test Reports For roof materials documentation indicating that roof materials comply

with Solar Reflectance Index requirements

9172018

2 Product Data For recycled content indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content

and cost

C Shop Drawings

1 Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels details of edge conditions joints

panel profiles corners anchorages attachment system trim flashings closures and accessories

and special details

2 Accessories Include details of the flashing trim and anchorage systems at a scale of not less than

3 inches per 12 inches (15)

D Calculations

1 Include calculations with registered engineer seal verifying roof panel and attachment method

resist wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes

E Samples for Initial Selection For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes

1 Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection

F Samples for Verification For each type of exposed finish required prepared on Samples of size indicated

1 Metal Panels 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width Include clips fasteners closures

and other metal panel accessories

A Qualification Data For Manufacturer and Installer

B Product Test Reports For each product for tests performed by a qualified testing agency

C Field quality-control reports

D Sample Warranties For special warranties

16 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Maintenance Data For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals

A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in architectural sheet metal products

B Installer Qualifications An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved

by manufacturer

9172018

A Deliver components metal panels and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed

Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling

B Unload store and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending warping twisting and surface

damage

C Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated

covering Store metal panels to ensure dryness with positive slope for drainage of water Do not store

metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining denting or other surface damage

D Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels until installation Remove as panels are being

installed Verify film is not left on installed panels

19 FIELD CONDITIONS

A Weather Limitations Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions

permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers written instructions and

warranty requirements

110 COORDINATION

A Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs equipment supports and roof penetrations with actual

equipment provided

B Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work flashing trim construction of soffits and

other adjoining work to provide a leakproof secure and noncorrosive installation

111 WARRANTY

A Special Galvalume Substrate Warranty Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period

1 Failures include but are not limited to the following

a Structural failures including rupturing or perforating

b Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering

2 Warranty Period 20 years and 6 months from date of Substantial Completion

B Special Installer Warranty Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel Applicator guaranteeing

materials and workmanship for watertightness of the roofing system flashings penetrations and

against all leaks

1 Warranty Period Two years from date of Substantial Completion

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Recycled Content Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less

than 29 percent

B Energy Performance Provide roof panels according to one of the following when tested according to

CRRC-1

1 Three-year aged solar reflectance of not less than 035

2 Three-year aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 29 when calculated according to

ASTM E 1980

C Air Infiltration Air leakage of not more than 006 cfmsq ft (03 Ls per sq m) when tested according to

ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference

1 Test-Pressure Difference 624 lbfsq ft (300 Pa)

D Water Penetration under Static Pressure No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646

and ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference

E Hydrostatic Head Resistance No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E2140

F Wind-Uplift Resistance Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-

resistance class indicated

1 Uplift Rating UL 90

G Thermal Movements Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by

preventing buckling opening of joints overstressing of components failure of joint sealants failure of

connections and other detrimental effects Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due

to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss

22 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A General Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and

interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically

attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps Include clips cleats pressure plates and

accessories required for weathertight installation

1 Steel Panel Systems Unless more stringent requirements are indicated comply with

ASTM E 1514

2 Aluminum Panel Systems Unless more stringent requirements are indicated comply with

ASTM E 1637

B Vertical-Rib Seamed-Joint Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges

and panel striations between ribs designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels

to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels engaging opposite edge of adjacent

panels and mechanically seaming panels together

9172018

1 Basis-of-Design Products include but are not limited to Berridge Manufacturing Company Zee-

lock (90o seam)

2 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 792A 792M Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation structural quality

Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755A 755M

a Nominal Thickness 0024 inch (061 mm)

b Exterior Finish Galvalume

c Painted materials shall have a removable plastic film to protect the paint during roll

forming shipping and handling

3 Clips Continuous Zee-rib with Vinyl Weatherseal insert to accommodate thermal movement

a All clips hardware and fasteners utilized for this installation shall be non-ferrous

(aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel) to the extent practicable

4 Joint Type Single folded

5 Panel Coverage 16 inches (406 mm)

6 Panel Height 20 inches (51 mm)

23 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A Self-Adhering High-Temperature Underlayment Provide self-adhering cold-applied sheet

underlayment a minimum of 40 mils (102 mm) thick consisting of slip-resistant polyethylene-film

top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive with release-paper backing

Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer

1 Thermal Stability Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) ASTM D 1970

2 Low-Temperature Flexibility Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) ASTM D 1970

3 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the

following

a Mid-States Asphalt Quick Stick HT Pro

b Polyglass Polystick MTS

c Soprema Lastobond Shield HT

d Tamko TW Underlayment or TW Metal amp Tile Underlayment

B Felt Underlayment ASTM D 226D 22M Type II (No 30) asphalt-saturated organic felts

24 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring ASTM C 645 cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet

ASTM A 653A 653M G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792A 792M

Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation unless otherwise indicated Provide manufacturers

standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system

B Panel Accessories Provide components required for a complete weathertight panel system including

trim copings fasciae mullions sills corner units clips flashings sealants gaskets fillers closure

strips and similar items Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated

9172018

1 Closures Provide closures at eaves and ridges fabricated of same metal as metal panels

2 Backing Plates Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices fabricated from material

recommended by manufacturer

C Flashing and Trim Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to

seal against weather and to provide finished appearance Locations include but are not limited to

eaves rakes corners bases framed openings ridges fasciae and fillers Finish flashing and trim with

same finish system as adjacent metal panels

D Gutters Formed from same material as roof panels complete with end pieces outlet tubes and other

special pieces as required Fabricate in minimum 96-inch (2400-mm) long sections of size and metal

thickness according to SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Furnish gutter supports spaced

a maximum of 36 inches (914 mm) oc fabricated from same metal as gutters Provide wire ball

strainers of compatible metal at outlets Finish gutters to match metal roof panels All clips hardware

and fasteners utilized for gutter installations shall be non-ferrous (aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel)

to the extent practicable

E Downspouts Formed from same material as roof panels Fabricate in 10-foot (3-m) long sections

complete with formed elbows and offsets of size and metal thickness according to SMACNAs

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Finish downspouts to match gutters All clips hardware and

fasteners utilized for downspout installations shall be non-ferrous (aluminum or Type 316 stainless

steel) to the extent practicable

F Panel Fasteners Type 316 stainless steel (preferred) zinc-coated steel corrosion resisting steel zinc cast

head or nylon capped steel type and size as approved for the applicable loading requirements

G Panel Sealants Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel

materials are nonstaining and do not damage panel finish

1 Joint Sealant Silicone sealant of type grade class and use classifications required to seal joints

in metal panels and remain weathertight and as recommended in writing by metal panel

manufacturer

25 FABRICATION

A General Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory by manufacturers standard

procedures and processes as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by

laboratory testing Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements

B On-Site Fabrication Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section metal panels may be

fabricated on-site using factory set non-adjustable portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of

same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels Fabricate according

to equipment manufacturers written instructions and to comply with details shown

C Provide panel profile including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs if any for full length of panel

D Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturers

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply

to design dimensions metal and other characteristics of item indicated

1 Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning buckling and tool

marks and that are true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems

2 Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to

comply with SMACNA standards

9172018

3 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from

compatible noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer

a Size As recommended by SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual or metal panel

manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured

26 FINISHES

A Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable

temporary protective covering before shipping

B Appearance of Finished Work Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if

they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples Noticeable variations in same piece are

unacceptable Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range

of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast

C Steel Panels and Accessories

1 Two-Coat Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent

PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating

line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013

mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare

pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin

manufacturers written instructions

2 Mica Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes

containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel

manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film thickness of 075plusmn 005

mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide a total dry film thickness

of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to

comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions

3 Metallic Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic

flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear

topcoat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line with a top side dry film

thickness of 075plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) over 02plusmn 005 mil (00013 mm) primer coat to provide

a total dry film thickness of 095plusmn 010 mil (0024 mm) Prepare pretreat and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions

4 Concealed Finish Apply pretreatment and manufacturers standard white or light-colored acrylic

or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film

thickness of 035 mil (0009 mm)

D Aluminum Panels and Accessories

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

A Examine substrates areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances metal panel supports and other conditions affecting performance of the Work

1 Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters purlins angles channels and

other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment

tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer

2 Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking

and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer

a Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration

B Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of

penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation

C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

32 PREPARATION

A Miscellaneous Supports Install subframing furring and other miscellaneous panel support members and

anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturers written recommendations

33 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment Apply primer if required by manufacturer Comply with temperature

restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation Apply at locations indicated below wrinkle

free in shingle fashion to shed water and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) staggered

24 inches (610 mm) between courses Overlap side edges not less than 36 inches (9144 mm Roll laps

with roller Cover underlayment within 14 days or as directed by the underlayment product

manufacturer

1 Apply over the entire roof surface

B Flashings Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in

Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

9172018

34 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A General Install metal panels according to manufacturers written instructions in orientation sizes and

locations indicated Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated Anchor metal

panels and other components of the Work securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural

movement

1 Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels to be level to 14 inch in 20 ft (6 mm

in 61 m)

2 Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings Do not begin installation until air- or

water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed

3 Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment

4 Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds

5 Panels should be continuous without end laps

6 Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten

7 Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels

B Fasteners

1 Steel Panels Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior use galvanized-steel

fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior

2 Aluminum Panels Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior use stainless-

steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior

C Anchor Clips Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place using

manufacturers approved fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions

D Metal Protection Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates protect against

galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer

E Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips

at each standing-seam joint at location spacing and with fasteners recommended in writing by

manufacturer

1 Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners

2 Install pressure plates if required at locations indicated in manufacturers written installation

instructions

3 Seamed Joint Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip

metal roof panel and factory-applied vinyl weatherseal are completely engaged

F Accessory Installation Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting

and provide for thermal expansion Coordinate installation with flashings and other components

1 Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim copings corners

seam covers flashings sealants gaskets fillers and similar items Provide types indicated by

metal roof panel manufacturers or if not indicated types recommended by metal roof panel

manufacturer

G Flashing and Trim Comply with performance requirements manufacturers written installation

instructions and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Provide concealed fasteners where

possible and set units true to line and level as indicated Install work with laps joints and seams that

will be permanently watertight and weather resistant

9172018

1 Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line

and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems Install sheet metal flashing

and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance

2 Expansion Provisions Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim

H Gutters Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints Attach gutters to eave with

gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) oc using manufacturers standard fasteners

Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant Provide for thermal expansion

I Downspouts Join sections with telescoping joints Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts

securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60

inches (1524 mm) oc in between

1 Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building

2 Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated

J Roof Curbs Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels

K Pipe Flashing Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels Fasten and seal to metal roof

panels as recommended by manufacturer

35 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A Installation Tolerances Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 14 inch in 20 feet

(6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 18-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining

faces and of alignment of matching profiles

A Manufacturers Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal

roof panel installation including accessories Report results in writing

B Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do

not comply with specified requirements

C Additional tests and inspections at Contractors expense are performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements

37 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films if any as metal panels are installed unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions On completion of metal panel

installation clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer Maintain in a clean

condition during construction

B Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish

touchup or similar minor repair procedures

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07620- Page 1 of 5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07620

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories

1 Roof-drainage systems

2 Metal flashing

B Related Sections The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section

1 Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as

part of masonry work

2 Division 7 Section Joint Sealants for elastomeric sealants

A General Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads structural movement thermally in-

duced movement and exposure to weather without failing

B Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Da-

ta Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone

1 Wind Zone 1 Wind pressures of 21 to 30 psf (100 to 144 kPa)

104 SUBMITTALS

A General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections

B Product Data including manufacturers material and finish data installation instructions and general rec-

ommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product

A Installer Qualifications Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim

work similar in material design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of success-

ful in-service performance

9172018

A Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each in-

stallation Ensure best possible weather resistance durability of Work and protection of materials and

finishes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 METALS

A Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet ASTM A 653A 653M G90 coating designation structural quali-

202 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A Fasteners All fasteners and hardware shall be non-ferrous to the maximum extent feasible ideally 316

stainless steel At a minimum fasteners and hardware shall be same metal as sheet metal flashing or other

noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer Match finish of exposed heads with

material being fastened

B Asphalt Mastic SSPC-Paint 12 solvent-type asphalt mastic nominally free of sulfur and containing no

asbestos fibers compounded for 15-mil (04-mm) dry film thickness per coat

C Mastic Sealant Polyisobutylene nonhardening nonskinning nondrying nonmigrating sealant

D Elastomeric Sealant Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of compo-

nents being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section

Joint Sealants

E Adhesives Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-

resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal

F Paper Slip Sheet 5-lbsquare (0244 kgsq m) red rosin sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-

790 Type I Style 1b

G Metal Accessories Provide sheet metal clips straps anchoring devices and similar accessory units as re-

quired for installation of Work matching or compatible with material being installed noncorrosive size

and thickness required for performance

H Roofing Cement ASTM D 4586 Type I asbestos free asphalt based

203 FABRICATION GENERAL

A Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommenda-

tions of SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to the design dimensions metal and

other characteristics of the item indicated

9172018

B Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in wa-

terproof and weather-resistant performance once installed Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be

covered before fabricating sheet metal

C Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and that

is true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems

D Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams Tin edges to be seamed form

seams and solder

E Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to

F Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at loca-

tions of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer

G Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces

of sheet metal exposed to public view

H Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or

from compatible noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer

1 Size As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but nev-

er less than thickness of metal being secured

204 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A General Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance require-

ments but not less than that listed below for each application and metal

B Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm) Fabricate from the following material

1 Galvanized Steel 00217 inch (055 mm) thick

C Downspouts Fabricate from the following material

D Flashing (not otherwise specified) Exposed Trim Roof Penetration Flashing Fabricate from the follow-

ing material

E Flashing Receivers Drip Edges Eave Flashing Fabricate from the following material

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and veri-

fy that Work may properly commence Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION

A General Unless otherwise indicated install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance re-

quirements manufacturers installation instructions and SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated providing for thermal expansion of metal

units conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated Install Work with

laps joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof

B Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and that

is true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems Install sheet metal

flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal

C Expansion Provisions Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work Space movement

joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or inter-

section Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be suf-

ficiently weatherproof and waterproof form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges not less

than 1 inch (25 mm) deep filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints)

D Soldered Joints Clean surfaces to be soldered removing oils and foreign matter Pretin edges of sheets to

be soldered to a width of 1-12 inches (38 mm) except where pretinned surface would show in finished

1 Do not use torches for soldering Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint Fill

joint completely Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces

comply with SMACNA standards Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant

1 Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered

F Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams Tin edges to be seamed form

seams and solder

G Separations Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed sur-

faces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by

manufacturer

H Roof-Drainage Accessories Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal with straps adhesives

and anchors recommended by SMACNAs Manual or the item manufacturer to drain roof in the most ef-

ficient manner Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation

I Roof-Penetration Flashing Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation

of items penetrating roof Install flashing as follows

9172018

1 Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping being careful not to block vent piping with flashing

2 Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof other than lead flashing on vent piping

A Clean exposed metal surfaces removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration

of finishes

B Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during

construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial

Completion

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 07920- Page 1 of 6 Joint Sealants MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A This Section includes sealants for the following applications including those specified by reference to

this Section

1 Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces

a Control and expansion joints

b Joints between different materials

c Perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows

d Other joints as indicated

2 Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

a Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows

b Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls floors and counters

c Other joints as indicated

A Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals

without staining or deteriorating joint substrates

104 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data For each joint-sealant product indicated provide data indicating sealant chemical charac-

teristics performance criteria and limitations

B Samples for Initial Selection Manufacturers color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing

the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view

A Source Limitations Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer

462018

A Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manu-

facturer product name and designation color expiration date pot life curing time and mixing instruc-

tions for multicomponent materials

B Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers written instructions to prevent their deterio-

ration or damage due to moisture high or low temperatures contaminants or other causes

A Environmental Limitations Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following condi-

1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant

manufacturer

2 When joint substrates are wet

B Joint-Width Conditions Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than

those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated

C Joint-Substrate Conditions Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable

of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A Available Products Subject to compliance with requirements products that may be incorporated into the

Work include but are not limited to the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3

202 MATERIALS GENERAL

A Compatibility Provide joint sealants backings and other related materials that are compatible with one

another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant

manufacturer based on testing and field experience

B Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range for this charac-

teristic

203 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A Elastomeric Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liq-

uid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 in-

cluding those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type grade class and uses

462018

B Stain-Test-Response Characteristics Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-

Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates provide products that have undergone testing ac-

cording to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project

204 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each prod-

uct of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3

205 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A Latex Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the

Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3

206 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A General Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining are compatible with joint

substrates sealants primers and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated by sealant

manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing

B Cylindrical Sealant Backings ASTM C 1330 of type indicated below and of size and density to control

sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance

1 Type C Closed-cell material with a surface skin

C Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings Neoprene butyl EPDM or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056 nonabsorbent to water and gas and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down

to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C)Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to

provide a secondary seal to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant perfor-

D Bond-Breaker Tape Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for

preventing sealant from adhering to rigid inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint

where such adhesion would result in sealant failure Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable

A Primer Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to

joint substrates indicated as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests

B Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant

backing materials free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates

and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants

with joint substrates

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants with Installer present for compliance with require-

ments for joint configuration installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint-sealant perfor-

302 PREPARATION

A Surface Cleaning of Joints Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with

joint sealant manufacturers written instructions and the following requirements

1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint seal-

ant including dust paints (except for permanent protective coatings tested and approved for seal-

ant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer) old joint sealants oil grease waterproof-

ing water repellents water surface dirt and frost

2 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing grinding blast cleaning mechanical abrading

or a combination of these methods to produce a clean sound substrate capable of developing op-

timum bond with joint sealants Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations

by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air Porous joint surfaces include the

following

a Concrete

b Masonry

3 Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete

4 Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain harm substrates

or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants

B Joint Priming Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer based

on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience Apply primer to comply with joint

sealant manufacturers written instructions Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond do not allow

spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces

C Masking Tape Use nonstaining masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods

required to remove sealant smears Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal

303 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A General Comply with joint sealant manufacturers written installation instructions for products and appli-

cations indicated unless more stringent requirements apply

B Sealant Installation Standard Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants

as applicable to materials applications and conditions indicated

462018

C Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability

1 Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings

2 Do not stretch twist puncture or tear sealant backings

3 Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace

them with dry materials

D Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back

of joints

E Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are in-

stalled

1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates

2 Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration

3 Produce uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

F Tooling of Nonsag Sealants Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins

tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth uniform beads of configuration

indicated to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint

1 Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint

2 Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces

3 Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated

a Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints

304 CLEANING

A Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints

305 PROTECTION

A Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from

damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or

damage at time of Substantial Completion If despite such protection damage or deterioration occurs cut

out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas

are indistinguishable from the original work

306 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide prod-

ucts complying with the following

462018

1 Products Available products include the following

a Chem-Calk 500 Bostik Inc

b Dynatrol Pecora Corporation

c Sikaflex - 2c NS Sika Corporation

d Sonolastic NP 2 Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc

2 Type and Grade M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag)

3 Class 25

4 Use Related to Exposure NT (nontraffic)

5 Uses Related to Joint Substrates M G A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated O

6 Applications Door perimeters expansion and control joints in concrete and masonry

307 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide

products complying with the following

a BC-158 Pecora Corporation

b Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc

c Tremco Butyl Sealant Tremco

2 Applications General sealing between similar or dissimilar materials including masonry steel

aluminum glass wood and stone

B Latex Sealant Where joint sealants of this type are indicated provide products complying with the fol-

lowing

a AC-20 Pecora Corporation

b Sonolac Sonneborn Building Products Div ChemRex Inc

c Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk Tremco

2 Applications General purpose caulking including metal siding and plumbing fixtures

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08111- Page 1 of 6 Aluminum Doors and Frames MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 08111

ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

11 Section Includes

A Aluminum Flush Doors

B Aluminum Door Frames

12 Related Sections

A Section 04810 ndash CMU (frame installation)

B Section 07920 ndash Sealant

C Section 08711 ndash Finish Hardware

13 References

A Aluminum Association Inc (AA)

1 AA 5005-H14 ndash Sheet Architectural

2 AA 6061-T6 ndash Heavy Duty Structures

3 AA 6063-T5 ndash Extrusions Pipe Architectural

4 AA DAF-45 ndash Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

B American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1 AAMA 2603-98 ndash Pigmented Organic Coatings (Polycron)

2 AAMA 2605-98 ndash Superior Performing Organic Coatings (Kynar)

3 AAMA 609 ndash Anodized Architectural Finishes Cleaning and Maintenance

4 AAMA 610-02 ndash Painted Architectural Products Cleaning and Maintenance

5 AAMA 611-98 ndash Anodized Architectural Standards

6 AAMA 701 ndash Pile Weather Strip

C American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

1 A 123 ndash Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

2 C 728-97 ndash Insulation Board Mineral Aggregate

3 E 330-97el ndash Structural Performance of Exterior Doors

14 Testing and Performance Requirements

A Structural Test Unit Minimum size of 3-feet (9144 cm) by 7-feet (21336 cm) with

24-inch (6096 cm) by 34-inch (8636 cm) vision light shall be evaluated compliant with ASTM E 330 testing

method

462018

B Test Procedures and Performances

1 With door closed and locked test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure difference

of 900 pounds per square foot (383 kPa) positive pressure and 900 pounds per square foot negative pres-

sure with 155 miles (2495 km) per hour

wind load

2 At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage permanent damage to fasteners hardware

parts support arms or actuating mechanism nor any other damage that would cause the door to be inopera-

15 Submittals

A Submit under provisions of Section 01300

B Product Data Manufacturerrsquos descriptive literature for each type door and frame include the following

information

1 Fabrication methods

2 Finishing

3 Hardware preparation

4 Accessories

C Shop Drawings Indicate the following

1 Elevations and details of each door and frame type

2 Schedule of doors and frames

3 Conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials

4 Location and installation requirements for hardware

5 Thicknesses of materials joints

6 Connections and trim

D Samples Two sets of color chips representing specified colors and finishes

E Verification Samples

1 Submit samples of each type consisting of aluminum door corner construction minimum 6-inch by 6-

inch (150 mm) legs

2 Where color or texture variations are anticipated such as anodized finishes include two or more units in

each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations

F Hardware Templates Provide finish hardware mounting details

G Manufacturerrsquos Installation Instructions Printed installation instructions for each product including product

storage requirements

H Operations and Maintenance Data Printed instructions for each product

16 Quality Assurance

A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum door and frame systems of

the type required for this project with minimum ten continuous years documented experience

B Product Qualifications Wind-load test certification conforming to ASTM E 330 on samples of previous

462018

products shall be provided for the type of door to be used

C Installerrsquos Qualifications Workmen skilled in handling aluminum door and frame systems of the type re-

quired for this project

D Instruction The manufacturer or his representative will be available for consultation to all parties engaged

in the project including instruction to installation personnel

17 Delivery Storage and Handling

A Deliver doors and frames palleted wrapped or individually crated Doors shall be side protected with sur-

rounding grooved 2-inch (508 mm) by 4-inch (1016 mm) wood frame and covered with 275-pound (12474

kg) test corrugated cardboard

B Inspect delivered doors and frames for damage unload and store with minimum handling Repair minor

damage if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work otherwise remove damaged items and replace

with new

C Store products of this section under cover in manufacturerrsquos unopened packaging until installation

1 Place units on minimum 4-inch (1016 mm) wood blocking

2 Avoid non-vented plastic or canvas covers

3 Remove packaging immediately if packaging becomes wet

4 Provide 025-inch (635 mm) air spaces between stacked doors

18 Project Conditions

A Field Measurements Take field measurements of areas to receive aluminum frames note discrepancies on

submitted shop drawings

19 Scheduling

A Ensure that all approvals andor shop drawings are supplied or returned to the manufacturer in time for fab-

rication without affecting construction progress schedule

B Ensure that templates andor actual hardware requested by manufacturer are available in time for fabrication

without affecting construction progress schedule

110 Warranty

A Manufacturer Ten year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials including warping rotting

decaying or bowing

B Installer Warrant installation procedures and performance for five years against defects due to workman-

ship and materials handling

21 Manufacturers

A Acceptable Manufacturers include the following and approved equals

462018

Cline Aluminum Doors Inc

112 ndash 32nd Avenue West Bradenton Florida 34205-8907

Telephone (800) 648-6736 (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153

22 Components

A Aluminum Members Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength corrosion resistance

and application of required finish

B Aluminum Door Components Minimum 5-ply composite laminated construction to include

1 Facing One-piece 0040-inch (102 mm) vertically ribbed embossed pattern 5005-H14 stretcher-leveled

aluminum alloy

2 Substrate One-piece oil-tempered hardboard backer

3 Core Organic materials shall be used to form a marine grade honeycomb core with high compression

strength of 948 psi (ASTM C365) and internal aluminum hardware backup tube

4 Hardware Backup The hardware backup tube shall be a minimum of 425-inches (10795 mm) in width

1375-inches (3493 mm) in depth with a wall thickness of 00125-inches (318 mm) Contiguous for the

full perimeter of the door to allow for all specified and non specified hardware reinforcement

5 Hardware Prep Basic to include mortise lock edge prep or cylindrical lock prep and pairs prepped for

flush bolts if required

6 Bonding Agent Environmentally friendly adhesive with strength buildup of 350 pounds per square inch

(246 kgcm2)

7 Perimeter Door Trim Wall thickness of 0050-inch (125 mm) minimum in 6063-T5 extruded aluminum

alloy with special beveled edge cap design and integral weather stripping on lock stile

8 Replaceable Door Trim Mechanically fastened to the hardware backup tube allowing for replacement in

the field if damaged

9 Trim Finish To have minimum of a Class I anodized finish

10 Weather stripping Replaceable wool pile with nylon fabric polypropylene backing meeting AAMA

701standards Applied weather stripping is not acceptable

11 Materials Only nonferrous non-rusting members shall be acceptable including tie rods screws and re-

inforcement plates

12 Regulations All components and agents to meet EPA standards

C Aluminum Frames

1 Frame Components Extruded channel 6063-T5 aluminum alloy minimum wall thickness 0125-inch

(318 mm) cut corners square and joinery shall be mechanical with no exposed fasteners

2 Profile Open Back with Applied Stop (OBS) 175-inch by 6-inch (44 x15239 mm)

3 Hinge and Strike Mounting Plates Extruded aluminum alloy bar stock 01875-inch (475 mm) thick

mounted in a concealed integral channel with no exposed fasteners

4 Replaceable Weather stripping AAMA 701 wool pile with nylon fabric polypropylene backing at head

and jambs

5 Door Stop No screw-on stops acceptable

462018

23 Finish

A General All finishes shall be applied and warranted by door and frame manufacturer

B Finish Aluminum flush doors and aluminum door frames shall be finished with two-coat shop applied high

performance 70 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coating based on Kynar500 or Hylar 5000 resin formu-

lated by a licensed manufacturer and applied by manufacturers approved applicator to meet American Ar-

chitectural Manufacturers Association performance standard 2605 Color variation shall be no more than 2E

(CMC) when measured in accordance with MTCC 173-1989

C Color Finish color shall be selected by Owner from manufacturerrsquos full range of standard colors

24 Fabrication

A General Receive hardware if required by manufacturer

B Aluminum Flush Door Construction Of type size and design indicated

1 Minimum Thickness 175-inches (44 mm) 5-ply composite laminate system

2 Door Size Sizes shown are nominal provide standard clearances as follows

a Hinge and Lock Stiles 0125-inch (318 mm)

b Between Meeting Stiles 025-inch (635 mm)

c At Top Rails 0125-inch (318 mm)

d Between Door Bottom and Threshold 0125-inch (318 mm)

25 Accessories

A Fasteners Aluminum nonmagnetic stainless steel or other material warranted by manufacturer as non-

corrosive and compatible with aluminum components

1 Do not use exposed fasteners

B Brackets and Reinforcements Manufacturerrsquos high-strength aluminum units where feasible otherwise 316

stainless steel

C Bituminous Coating Cold-applied asphaltic mastic compounded for 30-mil (076 mm) thickness per coat

31 Examination

A Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in

manufacturerrsquos instructions

B Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict accordance

with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturerrsquos instruc-

32 Preparation

A Perform cutting fitting forming drilling and grinding of frames as required for project conditions do not

damage sight-exposed finishes

B Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals

462018

33 Installation

A Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturerrsquos instructions and approved shop drawings set

frames plumb square level and aligned to receive doors

B Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop

drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturerrsquos instructions

1 Seal metal-to-metal joints between framing members using good quality elastomeric sealant

C Where aluminum surfaces contact with metals other than stainless steel zinc or small areas of white bronze

protect from direct contact by one or more of the following methods

1 Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint

2 Apply good quality elastomeric sealant between aluminum and dissimilar metal

3 Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of paint recommended for aluminum surface

applications

4 Use non-absorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations

D Hang doors with required clearances as follows

1 Hinge and Lock Stiles 0125 inch (318 mm)

2 Between Meeting Stiles 0250 inch (635 mm)

3 At Top Rails 0125 inch (318 mm)

4 Between Door Bottom and Threshold 0125 inch (318 mm)

E Adjust doors and hardware to operate properly

34 Cleaning

A Upon completion of installation thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609

B Do not use abrasive caustic or acid cleaning agents

35 Protection

A Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial comple-

B Repair damaged or defective products to original specified condition in accordance with manufacturerrsquos

recommendations

C Replace damaged or defective products that cannot be repaired to Architectrsquos acceptance

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08330- Page 1 of 4 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 08330

INSULATED OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Section Includes Manual overhead insulated rolling doors Principal components of door system shall

be aluminum (or stainless steel)

102 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A Design Requirements

1 Wind Loading Supply doors to withstand up design wind loads as required by 2015 IBC

2 Cycle Life

a Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycle per day maximum

3 Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements

a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84

b Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 26 as tested per ASTM E90

c Minimum R-value of 80 (U-factor of 0125) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of

Fundamentals

d Insulation to be CFC Free with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero

103 SUBMITTALS

A Reference Section 01 Submittal Procedures submit the following items

1 Product Data

2 Shop Drawings Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data Show interface with adja-

cent work

3 Quality AssuranceControl Submittals

a Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 90012008 registration

b Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications - see 14 below

c Provide manufacturers installation instructions

4 Closeout Submittals

a Operation and Maintenance Manual

b Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification

A Qualifications

1 Manufacturer Qualifications ISO 90012008 registered and a minimum of five years experience in

producing doors of the type specified

2 Installer Qualifications Manufacturers approval

A Follow manufacturers instructions

462018

106 WARRANTY

A Standard Warranty Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship

B Maintenance Submit for ownerrsquos consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement

for installed products

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

A Approved manufacturers include but are not necessarily limited to Cornell Iron Works Inc Crest-

wood Industrial Park Mountaintop PA 18707 Telephone (800) 233-8366 Fax (800) 526-0841 Un-

derwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) ISO 90012008 Registered

202 MATERIALS

A Curtain

1 Slat Material No 6F (Listed ExteriorInterior) Aluminum

a Insulation 78 inch (22 mm) foamed-in-place closed cell urethane

b Total Slat Thickness 1516 inch (24 mm)

c Slats have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested

per ASTM E84

d Slat has an R-value of 80 and an STC rating of 26

2 Bottom Bar Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and ex-

terior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge

3 Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength [nylon] [cast iron] endlocks on alternate

slats each secured with two frac14 (635 mm) rivets Provide windlocks as required to meet

specified wind load

4 Exterior Slat Finish Clear anodized

5 Interior Slat Finish Clear anodized

6 Curtain Configuration

a Standard Curtain configuration

7 Bottom Bar Finish

a Exterior Face Match slats

b Interior Face Clear anodized

8 Bottom Bar Configuration

a Standard Bottom Bar Configuration

B Guides Fabricate with minimum 316 inch (476 mm) aluminum angles Provide windlock bars of

same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load Top of inner and outer guide

angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides Provide re-

movable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar

1 Finish Clear anodized

2 Configuration

a Standard Guide Configuration

C Counterbalance Shaft Assembly

1 Barrel Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 003 inches per

foot (25 mm per meter) of width

2 Spring Balance Oil-tempered heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for

proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N)

Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque

462018

D Brackets Fabricate from minimum 316 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or

roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end clo-

1 Finish

a Steel ASTM A 123 Grade 85 zinc coating hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

E Hood 0040 inch (1016 mm) aluminum with reinforced top and bottom edges Provide minimum 14

inch (635 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag

F Weatherstripping

1 Bottom Bar Replaceable bulb-style compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides

2 Guides Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side of curtain

3 Lintel Seal Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow

203 ACCESSORIES

A Locking

1 Manual Chain Hoist Padlockable chain keeper on guide

204 OPERATION

A Manual Chain Hoist Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain chain pocket wheel and

guard geared reduction unit and chain keeper secured to guide

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance

with approved shop drawings

B Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates

C Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate

302 INSTALLATION

A General Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware anchors inserts hangers

and supports

B Follow manufacturers installation instructions

303 ADJUSTING

A Following completion of installation including related work by others lubricate test and adjust

doors for ease of operation free from warp twist or distortion

304 CLEANING

462018

A Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer

B Remove surplus materials and debris from the site

305 DEMONSTRATION

A Demonstrate proper operation to Owners Representative

B Instruct Owners Representative in maintenance procedures

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08411- Page 1 of 3 Aluminum Framed Windows

MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 08411

ALUMINUM FRAMED WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL

101 WORK INCLUDED

A Furnish and install aluminum architectural windows complete with hardware and related

components as shown on drawings and specified in this section

B All windows shall be equal to Peerless Products Inc Series 4170 Thermal F-AW80 Fixed

windows (Basis of Design)

C Glass and Glazing

1 All units shall be factory glazed

102 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A Units shall comply with air water and structural requirements as specified in ASTM E 330-02 for

type and classification of window units required

B Test Procedures and Performance Requirements

1 Windows shall conform to all ASTM E 330-02 requirements for the type and

classification of window units required In addition the following performance criteria

must be met

2 Air Infiltration Test

a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference

of 624 psf

b Air infiltration shall not to exceed 01 cfm per square foot of crack

3 Water Resistance Test

a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331 amp ASTM E 547 at a static air

pressure

difference of 15 psf

b There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage

4 Uniform Load Structural Test

a Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a positive and negative static air

pressure difference of 120 psf

b There shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage

A Provide test reports from an AAMA certified laboratory verifying performance as specified in

section 102

B Provide test reports and window manufacturers letter of certification showing compliance with

ASTM E 330-02 for the appropriate window type

C Test reports shall be no more than four years old

104 SUBMITTALS

A Submit shop drawings finish samples test reports and warranties

1 Shop drawings shall indicate type of glazing screen and window finish to be supplied

2 Additional samples may be requested if so directed by the architect

462018

105 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A Protect units adequately against damage from the elements construction activities theft and other

hazards before during and after installation

106 WARRANTIES

A Manufacturers Warranties

1 Submit written warranties from window manufacturer for the following

a Windows Windows furnished are certified as fully warranted against any

defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service for a period

of one (1) year from date of fabrication

b Finish The pigmented organic finishes on windows and component parts

(such as panning trim mullions and the like) are certified as complying

fully with the requirements of the AAMA 260X specification and fully

warranted against chipping peeling cracking or blistering for a period of five

(5) years from date of installation

c Glass The insulating glass units shall be warranted from visual obstruction

due to internal moisture for a period of ten (10) years The manufacturer shall

furnish a test report and notice of product certification from an independent

laboratory showing compliance per ASTM E 2190-02 as passfail

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

A Aluminum

1 Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and tempered

B Fasteners

1 Fasteners shall be aluminum non-magnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted

by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window

members trim hardware anchors and other components of the window units

2 Exposed fasteners shall not be permitted on exterior except where unavoidable for the

application of hardware

C Thermal Barrier

1 All exterior aluminum shall be separated from the interior aluminum by an integrally

concealed low-conductance structural thermal barrier in a manner that eliminates direct

metal-to-metal contact

2 Thermal barrier de-bridge space shall not be less than 316rdquo

3 Thermal barrier shall be poured-in-place two-part polyurethane that has been in use on

similar units for a period of not less than two years and has been tested to demonstrate

a Resistance to thermal conductance and condensation

b Adequate strength and security of glass retention

D Hot Melt Silicone and Glazing Beads

1 Hot Melt Silicone shall conform to AAMA 800 specification

2 Glazing beads shall be extruded aluminum and shall be of sufficient strength to retain

the glass

E Sealant

1 Sealant shall be non-shrinking non-migrating elastomeric type conforming to AAMA

803 and AAMA 808

F Glass

1 Insulated glass shall be ( ) per ASTM E 2190-02 as passfail and consisting of ( )

exterior ( ) air space and ( ) interior

462018

202 FABRICATION

A General

1 Units shall be able to be re-glazed without dismantling the master frame

2 All aluminum frame and sash extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0062rdquo

B Frame

1 Master frame shall be no less than 4rdquo

2 Frame components shall be mechanically fastened

C Finish

1 Organic

a Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with organic

coating of type and color as selected by the architect

b Finish shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet or exceed AAMA 2603

2604 or 2605 specification

PART 3 EXECUTION

30 INSPECTION

A Job Conditions

1 Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances plumb level clean

provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordance with the approved shop

drawings

302 INSTALLATION

A Work to be completed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and specifications by

skilled tradesmen

B Set units plumb and level in a single plane for each wall plane without warp or rack of frames or

sash Adequately anchor units in place separating aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from

sources of corrosion or electrolytic action

C Adjust window units for proper operation after installation

D Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation

E Leave all exposed surfaces clean smooth and free of debris

303 ANCHORAGE

A Adequately anchor to maintain permanent position when subjected to normal movement and

loading

A After completion of installation units shall be inspected adjust and promptly cleaned to prevent

damage to finish or glazing

B Remove excess sealant labels dirt and other substances

C Initiate all protection and other precautions required to insure that units will be without damage or

deterioration at time of acceptance

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08711- Page 1 of 8 Finish Hardware

SECTION 08711

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SCOPE

A Work under this section is comprised of furnishing and installing finish hardware specified herein and

noted on the drawings for a complete and operational system including any electrified hardware

components systems and controls

B Product and hardware schedule submittals

C It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors

suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work

A Drawings and general conditions of contract including general and supplementary conditions and

Division 1-specification sections apply to this section

103 RELATED WORK

A Specified elsewhere that should be examined for its effect upon this section

1 Section 08111 ndash Aluminum Doors and Frames

104 HARDWARE COMPLIANCE

A Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and

complies with requirements of door and door frame All hardware used on fire labeled openings will be

listed for those types of openings and bear the identifying label indicating UL (Underwriterrsquos

Laboratories) approved for use on fire doors

B All hardware specified herein will be in compliance (to the extent required) with

1 NFPA-80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows

2 NFPA-101- Life Safety Code

3 ADA the Americans with Disabilities Act ndash title III ndash Public Accommodations

4 ANSI-A 1171 ndash American National Standards Institute ndash Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities

5 UL ndash Underwriterrsquos Laboratories

6 WHI ndash Warnock Hersey International Division of INCHAPE Testing Services

7 TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards

8 State and local codes including authority having jurisdiction

462018

105 GENERAL

A Finish hardware must be neatly and properly installed in accordance with the best practices as

approved by the Ownerrsquos Representative

B No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate the proper

installation of any hardware The General Contractor will be responsible for the proper fabrication of

all work or materials to receive the hardware

C Any specified hardware not specifically mentioned herein will be called to the attention of the

Architect during the bidding period so that an addendum may be prepared to cover such items It will

be the responsibility of the successful bidder to furnish all required finish hardware whether or not

herein mentioned unless excluded from this section of the specifications

106 QUALIFICATIONS

A The finish hardware supplier will be a person or firm technically proficient and experienced in this

trade who has been furnishing ldquoInstitutional Graderdquo hardware in the Austin area for not less than five

years and will be responsible for properly detailing and fitting material to the conditions required by

the Drawings

B Hardware supplier to be a qualified ldquodirect distributorrdquo of the products to be furnished In addition the

supplier is to have in their employment an AHC representative certified by the ldquoDoor and

Hardware Instituterdquo who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect

Contractor and Ownerrsquos Representative regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware

C Installer for mechanical hardware shall have a minimum of 2 years of experience of installing

architectural finish hardware and attend a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturerrsquos

representative of locks exit devices and closers

107 SUBMITTALS

A Hardware Schedule in a prudent and timely manner submit copies of schedule in accordance with

Division 1 General Requirements Schedule will be in ldquovertical formatrdquo listing each door opening

including handing of opening all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for

proper function of door opening as intended and finish of hardware

B Submit manufacturerrsquos cut sheets on all hardware items

C The General Contractor will deliver finish hardware templates to and coordinate with related door and

frame suppliers

D The General Contractor will furnish to Ownerrsquos Representative one complete copy of installation

instructions and maintenance guides on all hardware both electrical and mechanical

108 DELIVERY HANDLING AND PACKAGING

A Furnish all hardware to the jobsite securely boxed bagged wrapped or packaged with each unit clearly

marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule Include door and item number for

B Pack each item complete with all necessary parts and fasteners Include whatever information may be

necessary to show compliance with requirements and include instructions for installation and for

maintenance of operating parts and finish Transmit copy of applicable data to Installer

462018

C Hardware supplier is responsible for setting-up the hardware on the site in a suitable dry and secure

room provided by the General Contractor

19 WARRANTY

A Provide warranty that all items furnished under this section of the specification will be free of defects

in material and workmanship and will perform the services for which it was intended for a period of

one (1) year for door closers and ten (10) years for exit devices Replace repair or adjust any items

not fulfilling this warranty at no further expense to Owner

110 TEMPLATES

A The General Contractor will furnish in a timely manner finish hardware templates to each supplier or

fabricator of doors frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware

Contractor will check the shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions are

made for the proper installation of hardware with all specified operating characteristics and clearances

111 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A Provide Owner with manufacturerrsquos parts list and maintenance instructions under provisions of the

General Conditions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for

proper maintenance of hardware

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 HARDWARE

A Manufacturers as follows

Manufacturer Abbreviation Website

Best Access BES wwwbestaccesscom

Bommer Industries Inc BOM wwwbommercom

Falcon FAL wwwfalconlockcom

Glynn Johnson GLY wwwglynn-johnsoncom

Hager Hinge Company HAG wwwhagerhingecom

Ives IVE wwwivesingersollrandcom

LCN LCN wwwlcncloserscom

National Guard NGP wwwngpinccom

Rockwood ROC wwwrockwoodmfgcom

Schlage SCH wwwschlagecom

TrimcoBBWQuality TRI wwwtrimcobbwcom

Von Duprin VON wwwvonduprincom

Zero ZER wwwzerointernationalcom

203 FINISHES

A All exposed hardware will be dull chrome (US 26 D) finish unless otherwise noted Closers will be

powder coated epoxy enamel to match adjacent hardware finish

462018

204 FASTENINGS

A As required for finished installation

B Hardware furnished under this section of the specifications will be complete with all necessary screws

bolts anchors adapter brackets or other fastenings for proper application Such fastenings will be of

suitable size and type and will harmonize with hardware as to material and finish and as the

manufacturer supplies with their products Stops thresholds and holders will be fastened to concrete

with steel drop-in anchors and to doors with sex bolts All closers and exit devices will be thru-bolted

C Utilize screws and installation tools provided with the hardware No other screws or attachments are

acceptable Self-taping screws will not be accepted unless provided by the manufacturer

205 LEVERS AND TRIM

A Levers will be cast or forged solid brass (dull chrome US 26 D or 626) or stainless steel (US 32

D or 630) Zinc alloys or pot metal material will not be acceptable

B Roses for use with levers will be wrought brass or stainless steel and will have built-in

deadstops with concealed springs to keep lever from sagging

206 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A Will be of the mortise type only All locksets latchsets electrified locksets cylinders and trim

to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity of design and consideration of

warranty

B Case will be of 090 gauge Cold formed steel zinc dichromate plated 6rdquo high by 4-14rdquo wide by

1rdquo wide with post indexed trim

C Front will be armored wrought brass bronze or stainless steel adjustable for door bevel

reinforced by heavy gauge steel with stabilizing ribs fastened by machine screws Fronts will be

8rdquo x 1-14rdquo in size

D Strikes will be ASA size of brass or bronze with lips of length to protect all jamb trim but will

be no longer than so required Provide and install stamped box strikes at all locations

E Latch bolts will be three-piece anti-friction type 58rdquo wide 1rdquo high and with no less than frac34rdquo

protection with no delarin or plastic parts

F Deadbolts will be solid brass or bronze chrome plated with two hardened free-floating steel

pins to prevent sawing Size to be 58rdquo wide 1-38rdquo high and no less than 1rdquo projection

Hardened steel rollers are required with the deadbolt

G Backset will be 2-34rdquo

H Hubs will be forged brass or hardened steel Lever action will be balanced mechanically to

provide equal pressure on knob in either direction to actuate the latchbolt

I Springs will be a coiled spring for latchbolt return and a coiled torsion spring for hub return

J Spring will be 3-58rdquo x 2-78rdquo plus or minus 316rdquo

K Cases may provide apertures for post-indexed trim

462018

207 DOOR CLOSERS

A LCN 4041 (representative product) or approved equal

B All door closers unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings will be heavy duty

surface mounted full rack and pinion liquid (hydraulic) type with cast iron cylinders capable

of controlling door through 180 degrees of swing Provide full covers of non-ferrous non-

corrosive material painted to match the adjacent hardware finish

C Surface closers will be adjusted by key valves Furnish six (6) adjusting keys Spring power of

each closer will be adjustable and will be capable of meeting handicapped accessibility code

requirements

D No closer will be installed on the outside of any exterior door or on the corridor side of any

room door Wherever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of a door away from the butts

a parallel arm will be used Corner or soffit brackets will not be permitted Corridor installation

is acceptable where abutting walls prevent normal installation All fastenings to the door will be

by sex bolts

E Closers to have adjustable spring power which allows for closer sizing Closers to have separate

tamper resistant non-critical regulating hydraulic screw valves for closing speed latching

speed and backcheck control as a standard feature

F All parallel arms will be extra heavy-duty solid forged steel (EDA Extra Duty Arm) All closers

without exception will be installed to 180ordm door swing specifications Closers shall not have

soffit stops

G All door closers must be covered by a ten-year factory guarantee against defective material or

workmanship

H The successful bidder is required to keep in touch with the progress of the job and have a

factory trained representative visit the job prior to installation to train the General Contractorrsquos

installer on proper techniques and once again insure that all closers are properly adjusted at

completion of the installation

208 HINGES

A (BUTTS) BB1168 Series Hager (representative product) or approved equal

B Hinges will be five-knuckle standard or heavy-duty ball bearing button-tip full mortise

template type hinges

C At labeled doors or doors with closers provide steel (painted) bearing-type hinges

D Exterior door hinges will be of steel (painted) with non-removable pins or will have pins held in

place by a set screw which can only be removed while the door is open

E Provide heavyweight hinges on all openings with high frequency usage as indicated in the

hardware schedule

F Hinges (butts) will be of the class as indicated by manufacturerrsquos number in the hardware sets All

hinges will have sufficient throw to clear the door trim plinth or cove base but will have no

more throw than is necessary

G Hinges will be sized as follows

462018

1 Doors 3rsquo-0rdquo wide or less 4-12rdquo x 4-12rdquo (1-12 pair hinges)

H Quantity of hinges per door will be as follows

1 Door up to 90rdquo in height 1-12 pair (3)

209 EXIT DEVICES

A Falcon 2425 Series or Von Duprin 3399 Series

B Vertical rod exit devices will not be accepted

C Exit devices to be UL listed for life safety All exit devices for labeled doors will bear the UL

label for ldquofire exit hardwarerdquo All devices will comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101

requirements

210 DOOR STOPS

A Wall Mounted Trimco 1209W

B place door stops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing but do not present a

hazard or obstruction All floor mounted door stops will be installed using flush bolts and steel

drop-in anchors manufactured by Ramset or Red Head Anchors will be set at least one inch into

the concrete Lead anchors will not be allowed Floor stops shall be placed as far from the hinge

edge of the door so as to not allow a trip hazard

C Exterior door stops when possible should be wall mounted on a wing wall or recess that acts to

stop the door from swinging more than 90 degrees from the closed position If wing walls are

not possible to construct the alternative floor mounted stop is to be provided with appropriate

railing to prevent a tripping hazard

211 GASKETING

A Provide materials and finishes as listed in the hardware schedule or as shown on the Drawings

All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A1171 and the ADA If no

thresholds or gasketing is specified provide thresholds and complete gasketing at all exterior

doors and smoke seals at all interior fire rated doors as follows

212 PRODUCT STANDARDS SUBSTITUTIONS

A Unless otherwise approved in writing provide only the specified products

B All requests for substitutions must be made prior to bid in accordance with Division 1 General

Conditions and are to be in writing and delivered to the Architect

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

A Hardware installers shall be professional hardware installers with ten years of documented

hardware installation experience Contractor shall submit hardware installerrsquos names and

experience qualifications to Architect and Owner for review and approval prior to start of

hardware installation

B Check hardware against the reviewed hardware schedule upon delivery Do not install hardware

when it is apparent that the scheduled hardware will not function properly for the application for

462018

which it was intended Contact the Architect immediately for clarification and correction of the

application ndash prior to installation of the incorrect hardware

C Finish hardware installed prior to the building being ldquodried inrdquo and ldquoclimate conditionedrdquo which

shows any signs of rusting wear or abuse will be subject to rejection by the Architect or

Ownerrsquos Representative Any such rejected hardware will be replaced at no cost to Owner by

the General Contractor

D Mount hardware units at heights recommended in ldquoRecommended Location for Buildersrsquo

Hardwarerdquo by BHMA except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with

governing regulations including ADA and the Accessibility Standards of the Architectural

Barriers Act Article 9102 of the Texas Civil Statutes except as may be otherwise directed by

the Architect Use only the fasteners supplied by the manufacturer All fastening points will be

E Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturerrsquos instructions and

recommendations Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into

surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way install each item completely

and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application After completion of

the finishes re-install each item Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been

completed on the substrate The use of cardboard shim stock is prohibited

F Set units level plumb and true to line and location Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation Mortise and cutting to be done

neatly and evidence of cutting to be concealed in the finished work

G Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners Space fasteners

and anchors in accordance with industry standards

H Mount door stops using plated flathead screws and steel drop-in anchors

I Take care when using cleaning chemicals around finish hardware so as not to damage the finish

J Architect Ownerrsquos Representative and Finish Hardware Supplier shall inspect completed

hardware installation and operation upon completion of hardware installation Hardware

installer shall correct any installation deficiencies noted during this inspection

302 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy

of a space or area return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and

make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area Clean and re-

lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and

B Instruct Ownerrsquos personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware during the final

adjustment of hardware

C Door closers will be adjusted by a carpenter trained by the hardware supplier trained personnel

at completion of installation and again one month prior to expiration of the Contractorrsquos one-

year anniversary of substantial completion

462018

After installation has been completed obtain the services of a qualified hardware consultant to check

for proper application of finish hardware according to the finish hardware schedule keying schedule

and specifications In addition check all hardware for adjustments and proper operation

END OF SECTION

9172018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 08800- Page 1 of 6 Glazing MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications including those specified in

other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section

1 Windows

103 DEFINITIONS

A Manufacturer A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing

publications

A General Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and im-

pact loads (where applicable) without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the follow-

ing defective manufacture fabrication and installation failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight

and airtight deterioration of glazing materials or other defects in construction

B Glass Design Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only Confirm glass thick-

nesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions Provide glass lites for various size openings

in nominal thicknesses indicated but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)

required to meet or exceed the following criteria

C Thermal Movements Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following

maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and

glazing components Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar

heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss

1 Temperature Change (Range) 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient 180 deg F (100 deg C) material

surfaces

105 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data For each glass product and glazing material indicated

9172018

B Glazing Schedule Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a

schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location

C Product Certificates Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products fur-

nished comply with requirements

D Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating

glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility

with glass and other glazing materials

E Product Test Reports From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with re-

quirements based on comprehensive testing of current products

1 Glazing sealants

2 Glazing gaskets

F Warranties Special warranties specified in this Section

A Installer Qualifications An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material design

and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of suc-

cessful in-service performance

B Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product

and installation method indicated

C Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in Sub-

mittals Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-

month period

1 Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated as documented according to ASTM E 548

2 Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to

ASTM C 920 and where applicable to other standard test methods

D Safety Glass Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and

ANSI Z971

1 Subject to compliance with requirements permanently mark safety glass with certification label of

Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities hav-

ing jurisdiction

E Glazing Publications Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and or-

ganizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated Refer to these publications for glaz-

ing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards

1 GANA Publications GANAS Glazing Manual

9172018

A Protect glazing materials according to manufacturers written instructions and as needed to prevent dam-

age to glass and glazing materials from condensation temperature changes direct exposure to sun or

other causes

A Environmental Limitations Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature condi-

tions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates

are wet from rain frost condensation or other causes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 INSULATED GLASS

A Glazing Insulated glazing unit consisting of two panes of 316rdquo separated by a hermetically sealed void

Inner surface of the outer pane of glass (surface 2) shall be provided with a Low E coating Unit shall

maintain a Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of not more than 050 and a U Factor of not more than 050

202 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A General Provide products of type indicated complying with the following requirements

1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materi-

als they will contact including glass products seals of insulating-glass units and glazing channel

substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer

based on testing and field experience

2 Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers written instructions for selecting glazing

sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation

3 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range for

this characteristic

B Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 in-

203 GLAZING TAPES

A Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Preformed butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100

percent nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without spacer rod as

recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated packaged on rolls

with a release paper backing and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated

1 AAMA 8063 tape for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure

2 AAMA 8073 tape for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure

9172018

B Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape Closed-cell PVC foam tape factory coated with adhesive on both sur-

faces packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive and complying with AAMA 800 for the

following types

1 Type 1 for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant

2 Type 2 for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid

sealant

204 GLAZING GASKETS

A Lock-Strip Gaskets Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated fabricated into frames with molded

corner units and zipper lock strips complying with ASTM C 542 black

B Dense Compression Gaskets Molded or extruded gaskets complying with standards referenced with

name of elastomer utilized and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal

C Soft Compression Gaskets Extruded or molded closed-cell integral-skinned gaskets complying with

ASTM C 509 Type II black and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal

205 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A General Provide products of material size and shape complying with referenced glazing standard re-

quirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated and with a

proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation

B Cleaners Primers and Sealers Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer

C Setting Blocks Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5

D Spacers Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by

glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated

E Edge Blocks Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking)

F Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing ASTM C 1330 Type O (open-cell material) of size and density to

control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance

206 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project with

edge and face clearances edge and surface conditions and bite complying with written instructions of

product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard to comply with system performance requirements

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine framing glazing with Installer present for compliance with the following

9172018

1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances including those for size squareness and offsets at cor-

2 Presence and functioning of weep system

3 Minimum required face or edge clearances

4 Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members

302 PREPARATION

A Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing Remove

coatings not firmly bonded to substrates

303 GLAZING GENERAL

A Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of framing systems glass sealants gaskets

and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated including those in refer-

enced glazing publications

B Glazing channel dimensions provide necessary bite on glass minimum edge and face clearances and ad-

equate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances Adjust as required by Project conditions during in-

stallation

C Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation Remove damaged glass from Project

site and legally dispose of off Project site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfec-

tions that when installed could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance

D Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants as determined by preconstruction

sealant-substrate testing

E Install setting blocks in sill rabbets sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications un-

less otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for

heel bead

F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites

G Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)

H Provide edge blocking where needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel as

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing pub-

lications

I Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern draw bow and similar characteristics

J Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on oppo-

site side provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to move-

K Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket

manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recom-

mended by gasket manufacturer

9172018

304 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to fram-

ing held away from glass Do not apply markers to glass surface Remove nonpermanent labels and clean

surfaces

B Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations includ-

ing weld splatter If despite such protection contaminating substances do come into contact with glass

remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer

C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent in-

tervals during construction but not less than once a month for build-up of dirt scum alkaline deposits

or stains remove as recommended by glass manufacturer

D Remove and replace glass that is broken chipped cracked abraded or damaged in any way including

natural causes accidents and vandalism during construction period

E Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date sched-

uled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion Wash glass as recommended by glass

manufacturer

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 09900- Page 1 of 8 Painting MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following

1 Exposed exterior items and surfaces

2 Exposed interior items and surfaces

3 Surface preparation priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop

priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections

B Paint exposed surfaces except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be

painted or is to remain natural If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface

paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indi-

cate colors If the schedules do not indicate color or finish the Architect will select from standard colors

and finishes available

C Do not paint prefinished items concealed surfaces finished metal surfaces operating parts and labels

1 Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components

a Finished mechanical and electrical equipment

b Light fixtures

c Distribution cabinets

2 Finished metal surfaces include the following

a Anodized aluminum

b Stainless steel

c Galvanized roof and wall panels trim and accessories

d Galvanized framing members

e Structural members provided with protective coatings in accordance with other specifica-

tion sections and not specifically noted to be painted

3 Labels Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Factory Mutual (FM) or other code-

required labels or equipment name identification performance rating or nomenclature plates

462018

103 DEFINITIONS

A General Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section

1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-

degree meter

2 Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-

degree meter

3 Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-

degree meter

4 Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at

a 60-degree meter

5 Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-

degree meter

104 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data For each paint system specified Include block fillers and primers

B Samples for Initial Selection Manufacturers color charts showing the full range of colors available for

each type of finish-coat material indicated

A Applicator Qualifications Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applica-

tions similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service

performance

B Source Limitations Obtain block fillers primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from

the same manufacturer as the finish coats

A Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturers original unopened packages and containers bearing

manufacturers name and label and the following information

1 Product name or title of material

2 Product description (generic classification or binder type)

3 Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture

4 Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents

5 Thinning instructions

6 Application instructions

7 Color name and number

8 VOC content

B Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient

temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition free of for-

eign materials and residue

462018

1 Protect from freezing Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take

necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health haz-

ards resulting from handling mixing and application

A Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air tem-

peratures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C)

B Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air

temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (72 and 35 deg C)

C Do not apply paint in snow rain fog or mist or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent or at

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point or to damp or wet surfaces

1 Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed

and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying pe-

108 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities de-

scribed below Package paint materials in unopened factory-sealed containers for storage and identify

with labels describing contents Deliver extra materials to the Owner

1 Quantity Furnish the Owner with 1 gallon of each color and each type of paint used on the pro-

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

Work include but are not limited to products listed in the paint schedules For all paint classifications

Sherwin Williams Co (S-W) products are listed as representative examples Products from other manu-

facturers that can be demonstrated to be equal in composition and material properties will also be ac-

ceptable upon approval by the Architect

202 PAINT MATERIALS GENERAL

A Material Compatibility Provide primers undercoats and finish-coat materials that are compatible with

one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

B Material Quality Provide manufacturers best-quality paint material of the various coating types speci-

fied Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification will not be acceptable

462018

1 Proprietary Names Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or mate-

rials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of

equivalent products of other manufacturers Furnish manufacturers material data and certificates

of performance for proposed substitutions

C Colors Provide color selections made by the Architect

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine substrates areas and conditions with the Applicator present under which painting will be per-

formed for compliance with paint application requirements

1 Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces re-

ceiving paint are thoroughly dry

2 Start of painting will be construed as the Applicators acceptance of surfaces and conditions within

a particular area

B Coordination of Work Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of

the total system for various substrates

302 PREPARATION

A General Remove hardware and hardware accessories plates machined surfaces lighting fixtures and

similar items already installed that are not to be painted If removal is impractical or impossible because

of the size or weight of the item provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and paint-

1 After completing painting operations in each space or area reinstall items removed using workers

skilled in the trades involved

B Cleaning Before applying paint or other surface treatments clean the substrates of substances that could

impair the bond of the various coatings Remove oil and grease before cleaning

1 Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not

fall on wet newly painted surfaces

C Surface Preparation Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturers written instruc-

tions for each particular substrate condition and as specified

1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime

2 Ferrous Metals Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated re-

move oil grease dirt loose mill scale and other foreign substances Use solvent or mechanical

cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Councils (SSPC) recommenda-

a Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before

priming

462018

b Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged Wire-brush

clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer and touch up with the same pri-

mer as the shop coat

3 Galvanized Surfaces Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is

free of oil and surface contaminants Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated

from coil stock by mechanical methods

D Materials Preparation Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturers written instructions

1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition free of foreign materi-

als and residue

2 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during

application Do not stir surface film into material If necessary remove surface film and strain ma-

terial before using

3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits

303 APPLICATION

A General Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions Use applicators and techniques

best suited for substrate and type of material being applied

1 Paint colors surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules

2 Do not paint over dirt rust scale grease moisture scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to

formation of a durable paint film

3 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used

4 The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in

place Extend coatings in these areas as required

5 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces Be-

fore the final installation of equipment paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fur-

niture with prime coat only

6 Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat nonspecular black paint where visible through registers

or grilles

7 Finish exterior doors on tops bottoms and side edges the same as exterior faces

B Scheduling Painting Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned pretreated or otherwise pre-

pared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration

1 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application meth-

od Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manu-

facturer If sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to manufacturers

written instructions sand between applications

2 Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted

3 If undercoats stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint apply additional coats

until paint film is of uniform finish color and appearance Give special attention to ensure edges

corners crevices welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of

flat surfaces

4 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying Do not recoat surfaces un-

til paint has dried to where it feels firm does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb

pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose

adhesion

462018

C Application Procedures Apply paints and coatings by brush roller spray or other applicators according

to manufacturers written instructions

1 Brushes Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied Use brush of appropriate size for

the surface or item being painted

2 Rollers Use rollers of carpet velvet back or high-pile sheeps wool as recommended by the man-

ufacturer for the material and texture required

3 Spray Equipment Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufac-

turer for the material and texture required

D Minimum Coating Thickness Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers recommended spread-

ing rate Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer

E Prime Coats Before applying finish coats apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manu-

facturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others

Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears

to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing

F Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth opaque sur-

face of uniform finish color appearance and coverage Cloudiness spotting holidays laps brush marks

runs sags ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable

G Transparent (Clear) Finishes Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster

Provide a finish free of laps runs cloudiness color irregularity brush marks orange peel nail holes or

other surface imperfections

1 Provide satin finish for final coats

H Stipple Enamel Finish Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture Leave no evidence of roll-

ing such as laps irregularity in texture skid marks or other surface imperfections

I Completed Work Match approved samples for color texture and coverage Remove refinish or repaint

work not complying with requirements

304 CLEANING

A Cleanup At the end of each workday remove empty cans rags rubbish and other discarded paint mate-

rials from the site

1 After completing painting clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces Remove spattered paint by

washing and scraping Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces

305 PROTECTION

A Protect work of other trades whether being painted or not against damage by painting Correct damage

by cleaning repairing or replacing and repainting as approved by Architect

306 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

462018

A Ferrous Metal Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal Primer is not required on

shop-primed items

1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer

a Primer Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manu-

facturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 13 mils (0033 mm)

1) S-W Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1

b First and Second Coats Full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate rec-

ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 30

mils (0076 mm)

1) S-W Industrial Enamel B-54 Series

2 Deep-Color Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer

b First and Second Coats Deep-color full-gloss exterior alkyd enamel applied at spreading

rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than

37 mils (0094 mm)

1) S-W SWP Exterior Gloss Paint A-2 Series

B Zinc-Coated Metal Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal

surfaces

1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer

a Primer Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufac-

turer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils (0031 mm)

1) S-W Galvite Paint B50W3

mils (0066 mm)

307 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A Ferrous Metal Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal

1 Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish 2 finish coats over an enamel undercoater and a primer

462018

a Primer Quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer as recommended

by the manufacturer for this substrate applied at spreading rate recommended by the manu-

b Undercoat Alkyd interior enamel undercoat or full-gloss interior alkyd-enamel finish

coat as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate applied at spreading rate rec-

mils (0031 mm)

c Finish Coat Full-gloss alkyd interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by

the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils (0031 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

END OF SECTION

11202017 10400 ndash Page 1 of 8 Signage

SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes warning signs and architectural signs as indicated on PLANS andor specified in other Sections

B Types of identification devices specified in this Section include the following

1 Warning Signs a HazardCaution Signs

b Right-To-Know Signs and

c Other Signs

2 Architectural Signs a Building Identification SignsRoom identification signs

A PLANS or attachment to this Section show sign type lettering and locations

B Identification of mechanical and electrical equipment is covered in other Sections

C Related work as called for on PLANS or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections

103 SUBMITTALS

A Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300 Submittals and Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals shall include the following

1 Manufacturers complete color range and typefont styles Font style shall at minimum include Times New Roman and Optima Semi Bold upper and lower case

2 Sign layout with shop drawings as follows a Scale layout of all site signs

b Full size layout of typical Room Identification Restrictive and Process Identification signs

c Full size layout and text of Dedication Plaque

3 Submit two each of the following samples Samples shall be resubmitted as required until approved

a A 12-in minimum square sample of proposed encapsulated Site Sign with subsurface graphics and 12-in mounting post and spacer attached

b A 12-in minimum square sample of each proposed plastic restrictive sign and proposed framing and mounting device

c A 6-in minimum square sample of proposed plastic sign showing proposed framing and mounting device andor pressure sensitive vinyl for Room Identification cut into letters in the colors proposed for the required color scheme

4 Cleaning and maintenance instructions for all signage components

104 WARRANTY

A Furnish minimum five year manufacturer warranty

A Warning Signs In accordance with OSHA Regulation Paragraph 1910145 ldquoSpecifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tagsrdquo

A Deliver and store signs in original shipping containers with manufacturer and contents clearly marked and showing on exterior Handle signs per manufacturerrsquos recommendations to prevent damage

107 PROJECTSITE CONDITIONS

A Inside

1 Unconditioned Areas a Temperature 50deg to 105degF

b Relative Humidity 95 maximum

2 Conditioned Areas a Temperature 65deg to 80degF

B Outside

1 Temperature 0deg to 120degF

2 Relative Humidity 100 maximum

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

A Manufacturer Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section provide identification signs from one of the following manufacturers

1 Seton Name Plate Company

2 Carlton Industries Inc

3 WH Brady Co Signmark Division and

4 Direct Safety Company

5 Architectural Signage Products 5214 Burleson Rd Suite 405-6 Austin Texas

6 Austin Architectural Graphics 516 Navasota Austin Texas

7 Innovative Graphics Systems PO Box 33139 Austin Texas 78764

8 Trinity Sign Graphics 7802 Doncast Austin Texas 78745

9 The Southwell Company PO Box 299 San Antonio Texas 78291

202 MATERIALS ANDOR EQUIPMENT

A Building Sign Blanks Use aluminum sign blanks appropriately sized for lettering required nominal size of 12Prime high times 36Prime wide or 24Prime high times 36Prime wide and nominal sheet thickness of 0040-inch minimum All exposed surfaces shall be matte finish as approved

B Warning Signs

1 High Performance Plastic UV resistant (4-5 years) minimum thickness 0060Prime with rounded corners and drilled holes Service temperature -40degF to 175degF

2 Pressure Sensitive Vinyl UV resistant (4-5 years) minimum thickness 0004Prime with square corners and service temperature of -40degF to 175degF

C Colors as specified in Table 1 of Fundamental Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source ldquoCrdquo American National Standard Institute Z531 - 1967

D Supports and Fasteners Stainless steel

E Posts 2-inch galvanized steel

F Concrete Class A

G Interior Room Identification signs 18 - thick Westinghouse Micarta raised graphics with domed Braille square corner and no borders applied as indicated on the Drawings and comply with ADA and ANSI A1171 requirements The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners

H Word and Picture Signs 18 - thick Westinghouse Micarta raised graphics with domed Braille square corner and no borders applied as indicated on the Drawings and comply with ADA ANSI A 1171 and OSHA The adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable liners Colors shall be in contrasting colors as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full color range

1 Word and Picture (WP) types shall include but not limited to the following (refer to signage schedule) WP236RB (Stairs) WP260RB (In Case of Fire Do not Use Elevator Use Stairs) WP237 (Exit) WP251 (Fire Extinguisher) WP284 (No Smoking in Elevator) WP278 (Emergency Shower) WP279 (Emergency Eye Wash) WP293 (Danger-High Voltage)

I Site Signs

1 For bidding purposes text and composition of site signs shall be as shown on Drawings Final text and composition shall be as shown on approved shop drawings Signs shall be located as shown

2 Signs shall be provided with galvanized U-channel posts Handicapped parking signage shall be white lettering and symbol on blue background (SS 53) and Alternative FuelCarpool Van parking signage shall be black lettering on white background (SS 49 sim)

3 Site signs shall be designed to withstand wind loading of 30 psf without damage or permanent deflection

203 FABRICATION

A Workmanship Drill or punch holes for bolts and screws Drilling and punching to produce clean true lines and surfaces Exposed surfaces of work to have a smooth finish Conceal fastenings where practicable

204 SIGN COLORS AND FONTS

A Warning Signs In accordance with OSHA recognized colors and heading descriptions

B With exception of warning signs sign colors shall be in contrasting colors as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full color range

C Building Identification Signs Sign coloring as chosen by owner Sign shall be with 3Prime high letters Font as selected by Owners representative from manufacturers standard full range of available lettering Fonts

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

A Examine condition of locations and surfaces on which signs will be installed Do not proceed with installation until defects or errors which would result in poor installation have been corrected

302 ERECTIONINSTALLATIONAPPLICATION ANDOR CONSTRUCTION

A Install signs at locations as indicated or required by ENGINEER Ensure that signs are installed plumb and true at mounting heights indicated and by method shown or specified Do not install signs on doors or other surfaces until finishes on such surfaces have been applied

B Anchorage Provide anchorage to ensure that signs are fastened securely in place Anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated to include slotted inserts expansion shields and power-driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts lag bolts and screws for wood Provide slotted inserts of types required to engage with anchors

C Post Mounting Fasten sign to post with two corrosion-resistant U-bolts and nuts Set post minimum of 24 inches in-ground in concrete footing with a diameter sized to provide minimum of 4 inch cover over post crowned to shed water Top of sign to be 3 feet above finished grade

D Door Mounting Fasten to door with four corrosion-resistant metal screws Mounting height to be 60-inches above finished floor to centerline of sign

E Fence Mounting Fasten to fence with corrosion-resistant wire at each corner of sign Mounting height to be 48-inches above finished grade to centerline of sign

F Signage shall be installed at the locations detailed or as directed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations ADA ANSI A 1171 OSHA and approved shop drawings

G Posts for site signs shall be shop mounted on base plates and installed on 12-in by 12-in by 4-ft deep footings constructed of 2500 psi concrete and secured with nuts on anchor bolts cast into the concrete Peen-over bolt threads to prevent removal as directed Set concrete to provide bottom of base plate at 6-in below grade Dedication plaque shall be installed into holes drilled in masonry with waterproof cement in accordance with the approved shop drawings Plaque shall be flush with wall Locate on interior as directed

H Damaged units or components shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner

I Signage shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the OWNER using the approved methods upon completion of the installation and again just prior to acceptance of the project

303 ADJUSTING

A Repair damage to signs incurred during installation Replace signs that cannot be repaired to new condition Clean glass frames and other sign surfaces adjust hardware as necessary

304 PROTECTION

A Protect work and adjacent work and materials against damage during progress of work until completion Wrap finished work with paper polyethylene film or strippable waterproof tape for shipment and storage and protect from damage during installation

305 SCHEDULES

A In addition to Signs called for on PLANS and in this specification section provide the additional Signs listed In Attachment A

A No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid

ATTACHMENT ldquoArdquo

Table 1 Building Signs Identification Material Sign Location

SUBSTATION NO 1 Aluminum Furnish and install four (4) Building Signs on the Electrical Substation No 1 Building exterior walls Coordinate with Owner for exact locations

Table 2 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location DANGER High Voltage ndash Authorized Personnel Only

Pressure Sensitive Vinyl

Doors 2 10 11 from exterior

Doors 19 20 on the side of the room into which the door swings into (eg on the control room side or the HVAC room side)

HVAC Equipment Room ndash Authorized Personnel Only

Doors 3 4 from the exterior

Control Room ndash Authorized Personnel Only

Table 3 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE CLOSET DANGER High Voltage ndash Authorized Personnel Only

Each exterior doors to Closet

Table 4 Warning Signs Identification Material Sign Location 1 The room contains energized battery systems

2 The room contains energized electrical circuits

3 The battery electrolyte solutions where present are corrosive liquids

Doors 2 10 11from exterior

END OF SECTION

462018

SAR WWTP Substation No 1 Replacement 10441- Page 1 of 3 Fire Extinguishers MWM DesignGroup Inc TBPE Firm MWM-1416

SECTION 10441

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A Section includes portable hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers

103 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data For each type of product indicated Include rating and classification material descriptions

dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting

brackets

B Warranty Sample of special warranty

C Operation and Maintenance Data For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals

A NFPA Compliance Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10 Portable Fire

Extinguishers

B Fire Extinguishers Listed and labeled for type rating and classification by an independent testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

105 WARRANTY

A Special Warranty Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire

extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period

a Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10

b Faulty operation of valves or release levers

2 Warranty Period Six years from date of Substantial Completion

462018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 PORTABLE HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A Fire Extinguishers Type size and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated

1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering

a Amerex Corporation

b Ansul Incorporated Tyco International Ltd

c Badger Fire Protection

d J L Industries Inc a division of Activar Construction Products Group

e Kidde Residential and Commercial Division Subsidiary of Kidde plc

f Larsens Manufacturing Company

2 Valves Manufacturers standard

3 Handles and Levers Manufacturers standard

4 Instruction Labels Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10 Appendix B

B Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container UL-rated 80-BC 10-lb (45-kg) nominal capacity with

potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in steel container

202 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A Mounting Brackets Manufacturers standard galvanized steel designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall

or structure of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated with plated or red

baked-enamel finish

c J L Industries Inc a division of Activar Construction Products Group

d Larsens Manufacturing Company

B Identification Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style size spacing and

location Locate as indicated by Architect

1 Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter

decals applied to mounting surface

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging

1 Remove and replace damaged defective or undercharged fire extinguishers

462018

302 INSTALLATION

A General Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

1 Mounting Brackets 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 11132019

SAR WWTP Substation 1 13851 ndash Page 1 of 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408

SECTION 13851

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Scope of Work

1 A single Fire Alarm System Contractor (FASC) shall furnish all services and equipment as defined herein and in other Specification sections as listed below under Related Requirements The FASC shall have the qualifications as described in subsection 102 ldquoRelated Requirementsrdquo this Section of the Specifications

2 Furnishing a complete system design responsibility for the fire alarm system design for the Substation No 1 Building accompanied by a complete set of PLANS that shall be designed by a Texas State Fire Marshalrsquos Office Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent certified designer who is licensed in the State of Texas and all submitted PLANS must be stamped by the licensed designer in accordance to the requirements of the Texas State Fire Marshalrsquos Office The system design shall be in accordance with UL NFPA NEC ANSI and IEEE standards

3 Furnishing a complete system installation responsibility which shall include the furnishing of all labor materials and items of service required for the completion of a functional fire alarm system for the Substation No 1 Building as reviewed by the Owner in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable contract drawings At minimum all aspects of the fire alarm system installation shall be directly performed by or under the direct supervision of a State of Texas Fire Marshallrsquos Office Fire Alarm Technician certified technician that is licensed in the State of Texas

4 Furnish and install a complete and fully functional fire alarm system as shown on the PLANS and as Specified herein for the Substation No 1 Building The fire alarm system shall utilize a complete electrically supervised digital addressable multiplexed signal transmission intelligent type fire alarm control system

5 Fire alarm control panel remote annunciator panels monitor panels fire alarm pull stations smoke and heat detectors audible and visual notification appliances addressable interface devices device enclosuresback boxes coverplates interconnect conduitwiring mounting hardware and all related incidentals for a complete and fully functional fire alarm system shall be furnished and installed Boxes conduitwire shall be sized furnished and installed per the requirements of the PLANS and Division 16 Specifications unless specified otherwise herein

6 All major elements of work are believed to be adequately described herein The FASC is expected to anticipate and include in the cost of the work any incidentals which may be required but not specifically expressed herein in order to provide a complete and fully functional fire alarm system for the Substation No 1 Building

7 The FASC shall provide a fire alarm system that meets all of the requirements stated herein The FASC is expected to make allowances for all necessary adjustments for the actual installation and to examine physical conditions which may affect the performance of their work and coordinate the actual pipe routing and equipment locations as necessary to accommodate the existing conditions obstructions and the work of other trades No extra payment will be allowed for FASCrsquos failure to make such allowances The cost associated with this task shall be included in the FASCrsquos base bid

8 The omission by the Engineer of any necessary system component as required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the Drawings or Specifications shall not relieve the FASC of the responsibility for verifying and providing such necessity without additional cost to the Owner

9 The fire alarm system shall meet all current NFPA code requirements including but not limited to NFPA 13 13R 13D 14 and 72 and per the edition as required by the City of Austin The fire alarm system shall meet all requirements of the City of Austin Fire Department ADA guidelines all applicable Texas Accessibility Standards and currently adopted edition of the International Fire Code (IFC) as amended by the City of Austin

10 The FASC shall be responsible for coordinating with ATampT and the Owner for the installation of telephone services to the Substation No 1 Building The Owner shall furnish and install the telephone cables up to the Substation No 1 Building the FASC shall be responsible for routing the telephone cables within the Substation No 1 Building and for the termination of the telephone cables to the Fire Alarm Control Panel

B System Description

1 The fire alarm system shall monitor the smoke detectors and heat detectors for trouble and activation with audible and visual indication at the fire alarm control panel

2 The fire alarm system shall be an addressable digital supervised system

3 As part of the fire alarm control panel furnish and install a digital alarm communicator transmitter to seize telephone line(s) dial preselected telephone number(s) transmit fire alarm supervisory and trouble signals to a remotely located digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station (operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction) over a telephone line(s)

4 The fire alarm control panel shall include interface capability with the fire suppression systems

5 The fire alarm control panel shall provide signals as required to the security system to release all electrically locked exit doors on general alarm where applicable

6 The fire alarm control panel shall provide interface capability to smoke dampers fans air conditioning equipment and other equipment as required for a fully functional and complete fire alarm system

7 Provide a total coverage smoke-detection system in accordance with the fire code and interconnect the total coverage smoke-detection system with all air-moving equipment as required per the Authority Having Jurisdiction to accomplish the required shutoff of air-moving equipment without the need of duct-mounted smoke detectors

A Drawings and other Technical Specification Sections show andor specify additional features required to describe and illustrate functional requirements of the fire alarm system

B FASC Qualifications

1 The fire alarm system designinstallation entity shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience designing furnishing and installing complete fire alarm systems for buildingsfacilities that are similar in scope and value as required for this project

2 FASC shall have current firm alarm certificate of registration issued by the State of Texas Fire Marshalrsquos office and employ the licensed Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent and Fire Alarm Technician(s) who are performing the work on this project

C Manufacturer Qualifications A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those required for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance

D Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components Obtain fire-alarm system components from a single manufacturer where possible

E Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 16 Specifications

F The Contract Documents are complementary what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all

G It is the CONTRACTORrsquos responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors suppliers and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTORrsquos Work

103 COORDINATION

A Coordinate as required with all necessary utility service providers such as telephone (ATampT) Authorities Having Jurisdiction such as the City of Austin Fire Department etc as required to establish the complete functional fire alarm system required for the project as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein

B Coordinate layout and installation of fire alarm system subcomponents with other trades Coordination with the overall construction sequencing of facility is required to meet the raceway routing and device mounting requirements of the Drawings and Specifications

104 SUBMITTALS

A Submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications Include

1 Riser diagram of fire alarm system initiating devices notification appliances and interface connections

2 Layout drawings showing locations of devices and appliances junction boxes wire and conduit routing auxiliary power supplies for visuals and connections to fire suppression system supervisory and ancillary devices

3 Dimensionedscaled top and bottom enclosure views front enclosure elevations and internal componentdevice layouts as applicable

4 Wiring diagrams as applicable

5 Catalog cut sheets Include all system sub-components annunciator panel as applicable

6 Calculations Include notification circuit voltage drop control panel battery-sizing and other calculations

7 Certifications Include the Alarm Planning Superintendent Alarm Installation Technician and Firm certificationsregistrations with the State of Texas Fire Marshallrsquos Office

B Field test reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements

C Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals previously specified make an identical submission to the City of Austin Fire Department Include copies of annotated contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review Resubmit as required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval Upon receipt of comments from the Authorities Having Jurisdiction submit to Engineer for review

D Certificate of Completion Comply with NFPA

105 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications Include

1 Installation and operation manuals

2 Renewal parts bulletin

3 As built drawings including approved shop drawings

4 Test data

5 Record copy of site specific software on CD ROM complete with all necessary files

6 Software licenses registered in the name of the Owner

7 Software and Firmware Operational Documentation

a Software operating and upgrade manuals

b Device address list

c Printout of software application and graphic screens

106 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND PERMITS

A Code Requirements

1 All aspects of the electrical construction shall comply with all National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA IEEE OSHA requirements local ordinances the Authorities Having Jurisdiction and all other pertinent codes and standards latest revision

107 SPECIAL SERVICES

A Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for two years from date of Substantial Completion

B Software Service Agreement

1 Comply with UL 864

2 Technical Support

a Provide software support for two years from the date of Substantial Completion

3 Upgrade Service

a Update software to latest version at Project completion Furnish install configure and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion Upgrading software shall include operating system Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software Provide 30 day advance written notice to the Owner to allow for scheduling and access to the system All upgrades shall also be provided to the Owner on CD-ROM and a full backup of the existing (prior to the upgrade) system software and settings shall be made on CD-ROM and provided to the Owner prior to upgrade

108 SPARE PARTS

A Furnish ten percent spare parts or a minimum quantity of three which ever is greater for the following

1 Audio visual signal units

2 Smoke and heat detectors

3 Manual pull stations

4 Lamps for audiovisual signal units of each type

5 Detector bases of each type

6 Printer ribbonscartridges

7 Fuses of each type

8 Keys and tools (minimum one set)

B Furnish the above spare parts packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing the package contents

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

A All products shall be U L Certified at minimum

B Manufacturers

1 Grinnell Simplex

2 Silent Knight

3 Federal Signal Corporation

4 Fire Control Instruments Inc

5 Siemens Cerberus

6 General Electric

7 or approved equal

202 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A Furnish and install fire alarm signal initiation by the following

1 Manual stations

2 Heat detectors

3 Smoke detectors

4 Duct smoke detectors

5 Verified automatic operation of smoke detectors

6 Automatic suppression system flow as applicable

7 Fire-extinguishing system operation

8 Fire standpipe system

9 other alarm inputs as provided by the Fire Suppression Systems as applicable

B Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions

1 Continuously operate alarm notification appliances

2 Identify alarm at fire alarm control panel and applicable remote annunciator panels

3 Initiate digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit an alarm signal to the remotely located digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

4 Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths

5 Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders

6 Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated and as required per the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and at no additional cost to the Owner

a Mechanical air-handling equipment including but not limited to mechanical ventilation equipment shall be supervised by the Fire Alarm System as required per the Authority Having Jurisdiction

b Coordinate all final requirements with the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to and at the time of shop drawing reviewapproval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

7 Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems serving zone where alarm was initiated

8 Record events in the system memory

9 Record events by the system printer

C Furnish and install fire alarm system supervisory signal initiation by the following

1 Valve supervisory switch

2 Low air pressure switch for dry pipe or pre-action sprinkler system

3 Other supervisory signals available from the fire suppression systems specified if any

6 Initiate the digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit supervisory signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

D Furnish and install fire alarm system trouble signal initiation by the following

1 Open circuits shorts and grounds in designated circuits

2 Opening tampering with or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices

3 Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control panel

4 Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control panel internal circuits

5 Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control panel

6 Failure in standby battery circuitry or battery charging

7 Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control panel or annunciator

8 Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system

9 Other trouble signals available from the fire suppression systems specified if any

12 Initiate the digital alarm communicator transmitter and transmit trouble signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

203 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A Construction Enclosed panel NEMA 12 rated at minimum suitable for wall surface mounting and the application environment in which the panel is located Also refer to the Drawings Provide multiple enclosures as required to contain the components as specified

B Power Supply

1 Primary Power Input 120 volts AC 60 Hertz single phase single point feed

2 Derive the necessary power for all fire alarm system sub-component loads from the single point feed inclusive of all needed power supplies voltage transformation and all necessary short circuit and overload protection for a fully functional system

3 Secondary Power Input 24 volts DC supply system with batteries automatic battery charger and automatic transfer switch complete with all accessories furnished and installed integral to the panel Batteries shall be sealed valve regulated recombinant lead acid type Batteries shall be sized to operate the complete system under the following operating scenario 24 hours with the complete system operating in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) operating mode followed by an additional 10 minutes with the complete system operating in alarm or supervisory mode (including all notification appliances)

4 Fire alarm system loads shall automatically transfer to the secondary power input upon loss of the primary power input

5 Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating

C General Requirements

1 Field-programmable microprocessor-based modular power-limited design with electronic modules complying with UL 864

2 System software and programs shall be stored in non-volatile programmable memory retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies

3 Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer

4 The System shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history Separate alarm supervisory and trouble logs shall be provided

5 Provisions for addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status with the following

a Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting

b Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device

c Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment

d other devices as required

6 All wiring and terminal blocks shall be tagged

7 Provide overall three ply phenolic red-white-red nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high for control panel Secure to enclosure with stainless steel screws

D Indication and System Controls

1 Alpha-numeric Indication

a Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control panel and addressable system components including annunciation supervision and control Display alarm supervisory and component status messages and the programming and control menu

b Type Liquid-crystal type 80 character minimum

2 Keypad Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming display and control commands

3 Discrete Indicating Lights and System Controls

a At a minimum provide individual LEDs identifying alarm and trouble conditions within each zone and the type of device originating the signal

b At a minimum provide system reset alarm acknowledge alarm silence system test and lamp test pushbuttons These may be integrated into the keypad at the manufacturerrsquos discretion

E Serial Interfaces Minimum of two RS-232 or Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports to provide connections to printers laptop computers and miscellaneous peripheral devices USB ports are preferred if available

F InputOutput Signals Furnish and install the quantity and rating of inputoutput signals as required to interface with the Fire Suppression Systems Smoke Dampers door locks

air conditioners fans and other equipment as specified elsewhere and as shown on the Drawings for a complete and functional system at no additional cost to the Owner

G Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter

1 Furnish and install a digital alarm communicator transmitter to automatically transmit alarm supervisory and trouble signals to a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station operated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

2 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station and shall comply with UL 632 Coordinate requirements with the Authority Having Jurisdiction

3 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be mounted integral to the Fire Alarm Control Panel

4 Functional Performance Unit shall receive an alarm supervisory or trouble signal from fire-alarm control panel and automatically captures one or two telephone line(s) and dials a preset number for a remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station(s) When contact is made with central station(s) signals shall be transmitted If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station over the remaining line Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station If service is lost on both telephone lines transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal Transmitter shall be field programmable for use with one or two telephone lines

5 Self-Test Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station

6 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall also provide

a LED display

b Field programmable selection of signals to be transmitted to the remote digital alarm communicator receiver central alarm station

c Programming device

H Printout of Events On receipt of signal print alarm supervisory and trouble events Identify zone device and function Include type of signal (alarm supervisory or trouble) and date and time of occurrence Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications Also print system reset event including same information for device location date and time Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm supervisory and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events Printer shall be furnished and installed integral with the fire alarm control panel

I Instructions Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal alarm and trouble conditions

J The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be manufactured by Tyco SimplexGrinnell and no equal

K The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall Comply with UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

L The following Fire Alarm Control Panel hardware shall be provided

1 Power Limited base panel with platinum cabinet and door 120 VAC input power

2 Minimum 2500 point capacity where (1) point equals (1) monitor (input) or (1) control (output)

3 Minimum 2000 points of annunciation where one (1) point of annunciation equals

a 1 LED driver output on a graphic driver or 1 switch input on a graphic switch input module

b 1 LED on panel or 1 switch on panel

4 9 Amp Power Supply minimum with temperature compensated dual-rate battery charger capable of charging up to 110 Ah batteries without a separate external battery charger Battery charger voltage and amperage values shall be accessible on the Fire Alarm Control Panel LCD display

5 Minimum One Auxiliary electronically resettable fused 2A 24VDC Output with programmable disconnect operation for 4-wire detector reset

6 Minimum One Auxiliary Relay SPDT 2A 32VDC programmable as a trouble relay either as normally energized or de-energized or as an auxiliary control

7 Minimum Three (3) Class B Addressable Notification Appliance Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs)

a Each Addressable Notification Appliance SLC shall be rated at 3A and capable of supporting up to 127 Notification Appliances per channel

b Wiring shall be 16 AWG to 12 AWG unshielded twisted pair wire Systems that require shielded wire for Notification Appliances shall not be accepted

c A constant voltage under both primary and secondary power conditions shall be maintained at the notification appliance field wiring terminal connections in the Fire Alarm Control Panel to ensure the voltage drop on the circuit is consistent under both primary and secondary power conditions

d For systems that do not provide a constant voltage source at the Fire Alarm Control Panel notification appliance field wiring terminal connections the fire alarm contractor shall

1) Provide separate point-to-point voltage drop calculations for all notification appliances under worst case secondary power specifications and

2) Perform a complete functional test of all notification appliances under worst case secondary power conditions

8 Minimum Three (3) Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC rated 3A24VDC resistive)

a NACrsquos shall be conventional reverse polarity operation and shall be for synchronized strobes and independent hornstrobe operation over two wires

b NACs shall be selectable as auxiliary power outputs derated to 2 A for continuous duty

c Strobe synchronization and audible cadence synchronization shall be across all panel NAC circuits Systems that cannot provide listed synchronization across all panel NACrsquos shall not be acceptable

9 Where required provide Intelligent Remote Battery Charger for charging up to 110Ah batteries

10 Expansion Power Supplies with minimum three (3) Class B integral Intelligent Addressable Notification Appliance Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs) for system expansion Expansion power supplys shall provide complete capability as the primary power supply

11 Power Supplies with integral conventional reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit Class B for system expansion Expansion power supplys shall provide complete capability as the primary power supply

12 Minimum Four (4) form C Auxiliary Relay Circuits (Form C contacts rated 10A 250VAC resistive) operation shall be programmable for other fire response functions Relays shall be capable of switching up to 10 A 250VAC inductive

13 The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall support up to (5) RS-232-C ports and one service port All (5) RS-232 Ports shall be capable of two-way communications

14 Remote Unit Interface supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of remotely located annunciators and IO panels

15 Municipal City Circuit Connection with Disconnect switch 24VDC Remote Station (reverse polarity) local energy shunt master box or a form C contact output

16 Programmable DACT for either Common Event Reporting or per Point Reporting

17 Fire Panel Internet Interface to provide supplemental notification and remote user access to the Fire Alarm Control Panel using Ethernet and TCPIP communications protocol compatible with IEEE Standard 8023

18 Modular Network Communications Card

M Cabinet Lockable steel enclosure Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures

N Alphanumeric Display and System Controls Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm supervisory and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands

1 The system shall have the capability to provide expanded content multi-line operator interface displays as indicated on the drawings and specifications The expanded content multi-line displays shall be Quarter-VGA (QVGA) or larger and be capable of supporting a minimum of 854 standard ASCII characters to minimize or eliminate the levels of navigation required for access to information when responding to critical emergencies and abnormal system conditions The QVGA operator interface shall provide operator prompts and six context sensitive soft-keys for intuitive operation

a Expanded content multi-line operator interfaces shall be capable of providing the following functions

1) Dual language operation with Instant-Switch language selection during runtime

2) Activity display choices for

a) First 8 Events

b) First 5 Events and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps)

c) First Event and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps)

d) Scrollable List Display displays a scrollable list of active points for the event category (alarm priority 2 supervisory or trouble) selected The position in this list will be the last acknowledged point (not flashing) at the top followed by the next 7 unacknowledged points (flashing)

e) General Event Status (alarm priority 2 supervisory or trouble in system)

f) Site Plan

3) Equal or hierarchal priority assignment In systems with two or more operator interfaces each operator interface shall be programmable to allow multiple operator interfaces to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual operator interfaces (locations)

4) Up to 50 custom point detail messages for providing additional point specific information in detailed point status screens

5) Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and background watermark images

2 Expanded content multi-line displays shall have the capability to provide Dual-Language operation

a Language selection shall be via a switch on the operator interface panel Operator interface panels shall support instant-language-switchover

during runtime to allow the operator to toggle between languages each time the language selection switch is operated without requiring complicated multi-step processes

b Both one-byte and two-byte characters shall be supported

O Distributed Module Operation File Alarm Control Panel shall be capable of allowing remote location of the following modules interface of such modules shall be through a Style 4 (Class B) supervised serial communications channel (SLC)

1 Addressable Signaling Line Circuits

2 Initiating Device Circuits

3 Notification Appliance Circuits

4 Auxiliary Control Circuits

5 Graphic Annunciator LEDSwitch Control Modules

a In systems with two or more Annunciators andor Command Centers each AnnunciatorCommand Center shall be programmable to allow multiple AnnunciatorsCommand Centers to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual AnnunciatorCommand Center locations

6 Amplifiers voice and telephone control circuits

204 MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A General

1 Fabricated of metal or plastic and finished in red with molded raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color

2 The Manual Pull Station shall be surface mounted Furnish and install manufacturers surface back box Furnish and install coverplate

3 Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm pull-lever type

4 Integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel

205 SMOKE DETECTORS

A General

1 Operating voltage 24 volts DC

2 Base Mounting Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring

3 Integral Addressable Module Arranged to communicate detector status (normal alarm or trouble) to fire-alarm control panel

4 Self-Restoring Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation

5 Integral Visual-Indicating Light LED type indicating detector has operated

6 Field adjustable Detector can be adjusted and tested after installation

B Photoelectric Smoke Detector

1 Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control panel and shall be able to identify the detectors location within the system and its sensitivity setting

2 LED or infrared light source suitable for use as a smoke detector and tested per UL 268A

C Ionization Smoke Detector

1 Shall respond to both visible and invisible combustion products

206 HEAT DETECTORS

A Heat Detector Combination Type

1 Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or rate of rise that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute

2 Mounting Adapter plate for outlet box mounting

B Heat Detector Fixed Temperature Type

207 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A General Requirements for Notification Appliances

1 Individually addressed connected to a signaling line circuit equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections

2 Connected to notification appliance signal circuits zoned as indicated equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections

3 Combination Devices Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections

4 Mounted on recessed outlet box Where surface mounted furnish and install manufacturers surface back box Furnish and install coverplate

B Horns Electric-vibrating-polarized type 24 volts DC with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille Comply with UL 464 Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 85 dBA measured 10 feet from the horn using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol

C Visible Notification Appliances Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate The word FIRE is engraved in minimum 1-inch high letters on the lens Provide rated light output in accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction

208 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A General Provide annunciator panel where required by the Drawings or by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction

B Description Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control panel for alarm supervisory and trouble indications Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control panel including acknowledging silencing resetting and testing

C Construction Enclosed panel NEMA 3R rated at minimum suitable for wall surface mounting and the application environment in which the panel is located Also refer to the Drawings

D Display Type and Functional Performance Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control panel Provide controls to acknowledge silence reset and test functions for alarm supervisory and trouble signals

E Provide overall three ply phenolic red-white-red nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high for each annunciator panel Secure to enclosure with stainless steel screws

209 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A Description Microelectronic monitor module for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts

B Integral Relay Capable of providing a direct signal tofrom equipment as required by the Drawings and Specifications for a complete functional system

210 MISCELLANEOUS

A Wiring

1 Non-Power-Limited Circuits Furnish and install wiring per Section 16200 ldquoWiring (600 Volts and Below)rdquo Exception The following minimum wire sizes apply

a Low voltage circuits No 16 AWG minimum

b Line-Voltage circuits No 12 AWG minimum

2 Power-Limited Circuits Furnish and install NFPA 70 Types FPL FPLR or FPLP as recommended by the manufacturer Minimum wire size is No 16 AWG

B Building Maps and Signage

1 Building map shall be provided adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel and each annunciator panel Map shall consist of floor plans with all room numbers and zones identified Maps shall be properly oriented and mounted in a durable frame Handwritten or hand-drawn maps shall not be accepted

2 Provide additional signage as required by NFPA and Authorities Having Jurisdiction at no additional cost to the Owner

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A Equipment Mounting Install fire-alarm control panel with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor

B Manual Pull Stations Mount in back boxes at 48 inches above finished floor

C Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing Comply with NFPA

D VisibleAudible Alarm-Indicating Devices Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than 80 inches above the floor or least 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower

E Although it may not be shown on the Drawings size furnish and install conduitwire to interconnect the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Building Telephone System

302 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A Furnish and install all wiring complete in a raceway system per all applicable requirements of the Division 16 specifications and the Contract Drawings with the following supplementary requirements

1 Color code all wiring differently from that used for normal building power wiring Use different wiring colors for alarm and supervisory wiring

2 Paint fire alarm system junctionpull boxes red

3 Ground fire-alarm control panel and associated circuits and comply with IEEE 1100

A Field tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and the Authorities Having Jurisdiction

B Manufacturers Field Service Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test and adjust components assemblies and equipment installations including connections for all tests

C Perform the following tests and inspections

1 Pre-Test

a After installation align adjust calibrate and balance the system and perform complete pre-testing

b Test audible and visual appliances smoke detectors and heat detectors according to manufacturers written instructions

c Test for proper function of automatic transfer between primary and secondary power sources

d Test battery charging and battery backup system

e Test interlocks between the fire alarm system and

1) Fire suppression systems as applicable

2) elevators as applicable

3) door locks as applicable

4) supervisory valves

5) annunciator panels

6) and other equipment

f Test for functional compliance with the Contract Requirements Correct deficiencies observed replace malfunctioning components as required and perform all necessary adjustments re-testing until satisfactory performance is achieved

g Maintain a log of testing and associated test results for the Ownerrsquos review

2 Final Test

a Provide minimum of 14 days written notice to the Owner when the system is ready for final acceptance testing

b Test system per the requirements of NFPA and the Authority Having Jurisdiction

c Correct all deficiencies and completely re-test work affected

d Provide a typewritten report of test results signed by the Technician and witnesses

e Provide Certificate of Completion per NFPA

3 After installation and final testing clean and vacuum all interior of the equipment Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish

304 TRAINING

A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owners maintenance personnel to adjust operate and maintain the fire alarm system Include software related upgrades and maintenance

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15061 ndash Page 1 of 10 Hangers and Supports for

Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 HVAC Piping and Equipment

SECTION 15061

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment

1 Steel pipe hangers and supports

2 Trapeze pipe hangers

3 Thermal-hanger shield inserts

4 Fastener systems

5 Equipment supports

102 DEFINITIONS

A MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc

B Terminology As defined in MSS SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports

A Design supports for multiple pipes including pipe stands capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems system contents and test water

B Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components

104 SUBMITTALS

A Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications

B Product Data For the following

C Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following

1 Trapeze pipe hangers Include Product Data for components

2 Pipe stands Include Product Data for components

D Welding certificates

E Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D11 Structural Welding Code--Steel

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A Acceptable Materials for support systems specified in this sections

1 Materials of Construction of Hangers and Supports 304 304L 316 or 316L Stainless Steel

2 Provide components constructed of low carbon Stainless Steel (304L or 316L) for items that are to be welded

202 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Description MSS SP-58 Types 1 through 58 Stainless Steel factory-fabricated components Refer to Part 3 Hanger and Support Applications Article for where to use specific hanger and support types

B Manufacturers

1 AAA Technology amp Specialties Co Inc

2 Bergen-Power Pipe Supports

3 B-Line Systems Inc a division of Cooper Industries

4 Carpenter amp Paterson Inc

5 Empire Industries Inc

6 ERICOMichigan Hanger Co

7 Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc

8 Grinnell Corp

9 GS Metals Corp

10 National Pipe Hanger Corporation

11 PHD Manufacturing Inc

12 PHS Industries Inc

13 Piping Technology amp Products Inc

14 Tolco Inc

203 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

Description MSS SP-69 Type 59 shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods nuts saddles and U-bolts

204 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A Description 100-psig-minimum compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield

B Manufacturers

4 Pipe Shields Inc

5 Rilco Manufacturing Company Inc

6 Value Engineered Products Inc

C Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping Water-repellent treated ASTM C 533 Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552 Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier

D Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping Water-repellent treated ASTM C 533 Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552 Type II cellular glass

E For Trapeze or Clamped Systems Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe

F For Clevis or Band Hangers Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe

G Insert Length Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature

205 FASTENER SYSTEMS

Mechanical-Expansion Anchors Insert-wedge-type 316 stainless steel for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used

1 Manufacturers

a B-Line Systems Inc a division of Cooper Industries

b Empire Industries Inc

c Hilti Inc

d ITW RamsetRed Head

e MKT Fastening LLC

f Powers Fasteners

206 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A Channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material All support channels shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo series P-1000ST and P-1001ST or approved equal

B All fastening hardware fittings supports threaded rods base posts clamps channel nuts framing system etc shall be fabricated with 316 stainless steel as manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A Cut fit and place metal supports accurately in location alignment and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment

B Mechanical equipment piping and tubing support channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material

C Field Welding Obtain approval of Engineer for any equipment support structures that require Welding prior to proceeding Comply with AWS D11 Structural Welding Code--Steel

302 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment

B Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections

C Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing

D Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching

E Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1) For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 30

2 Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2) For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes NPS 4 to NPS 16 requiring up to 4 inches of insulation

3 Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3) For suspension of pipes NPS 34 to NPS 24 requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation

4 Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4) For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 12 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required

5 Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5) For suspension of pipes NPS 12 to NPS 4 to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection

6 Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 34 to NPS 8

7 Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 8

8 Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 8

9 Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 12 to NPS 2

10 Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 38 to NPS 8

11 Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12) For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 38 to NPS 3

12 U-Bolts (MSS Type 24) For support of heavy pipes NPS 12 to NPS 30

13 Clips (MSS Type 26) For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction

14 Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36) For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange

15 Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37) For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe

16 Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38) For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-12 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange

17 Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41) For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

18 Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43) For suspension of pipes NPS 2-12 to NPS 20 from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

19 Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary

20 Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary

21 Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46) For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction

F Vertical-Piping Clamps Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8) For support of pipe risers NPS 34 to NPS 20

2 Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42) For support of pipe risers NPS 34 to NPS 20 if longer ends are required for riser clamps

G Hanger-Rod Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13) For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads

2 Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14) For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations

3 Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15) For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings

4 Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16) For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments

5 Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17) For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations

H Building Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Steel Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18) For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling

2 Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19) For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape

3 Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20) For attaching to bottom flange of beams channels or angles

4 Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21) For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams

5 Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22) For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large

6 C-Clamps (MSS Type 23) For structural shapes

7 Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25) For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge

8 Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27) For bottom of steel I-beams

9 Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28) For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads

10 Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29) For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads with link extensions

11 Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30) For attaching to structural steel

12 Welded-Steel Brackets For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod Use one of the following for indicated loads

a Light (MSS Type 31) 750 lb

b Medium (MSS Type 32) 1500 lb

c Heavy (MSS Type 33) 3000 lb

13 Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34) For sides of steel or wooden beams

14 Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57) For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required

15 Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58) For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited

I Saddles and Shields Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39) To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation

2 Protection Shields (MSS Type 40) Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation

3 Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts For supporting insulated pipe

J Spring Hangers and Supports Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types

1 Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47) Where indicated to control piping movement

2 Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48) For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-14 inches

3 Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49) For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs

4 Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50) To retard sway shock vibration or thermal expansion in piping systems

5 Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger

6 Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support

7 Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53) Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support

8 Constant Supports For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support critical terminal or connected equipment Include auxiliary stops for erection hydrostatic test and load-adjustment capability These supports include the following types

a Horizontal (MSS Type 54) Mounted horizontally

b Vertical (MSS Type 55) Mounted vertically

c Trapeze (MSS Type 56) Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member

K Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections

L Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections

M Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction

303 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A Steel Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89 Install hangers supports clamps and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure

B Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89 Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers

1 Pipes of Various Sizes Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers

C Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping

D Fastener System Installation

1 Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured Install fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions

E Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts bolts rods nuts washers and other accessories

F Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints expansion loops expansion bends and similar units

G Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying

H Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel Install additional attachments at concentrated loads including valves flanges and strainers NPS 2-12 and larger and at changes in direction of piping Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts

I Load Distribution Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment

J Pipe Slopes Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B311 (for power piping) and ASME B319 (for building services piping) are not exceeded

K Insulated Piping Comply with the following

1 Attach clamps and spacers to piping

a Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature Clamp may project through insulation

b Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert

c Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B311 for power piping and ASME B319 for building services piping

2 Install MSS SP-58 Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation

a Option Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers

3 Install MSS SP-58 Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees

4 Shield Dimensions for Pipe Not less than the following

a NPS 14 to NPS 3-12 12 inches long and 0048 inch thick

b NPS 4 12 inches long and 006 inch thick

c NPS 5 and NPS 6 18 inches long and 006 inch thick

d NPS 8 to NPS 14 24 inches long and 0075 inch thick

e NPS 16 to NPS 24 24 inches long and 0105 inch thick

5 Pipes NPS 8 and Larger Include wood inserts

6 Insert Material Length at least as long as protective shield

7 Thermal-Hanger Shields Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation

304 ADJUSTING

A Hanger Adjustments Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe

B Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-12 inches

No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section All costs are included in the Base Bid

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15083 ndash Page 1 of 17 Pipe Insulation

SECTION 15083

PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

This Section includes pipe insulation materials insulating cements field-applied jackets accessories and attachments and sealing compounds

102 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data Identify thermal conductivity thickness and jackets (both factory and field applied if any) for each type of product indicated

C Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details for the following

1 Insulation application at elbows fittings and specialties for each type of insulation

2 Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections

3 Application of field-applied jackets

D Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

A Installer Qualifications Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the US Department of Labor Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training

B Fire-Test-Response Characteristics As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency

1 Insulation Installed Indoors Flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less

2 Insulation Installed Outdoors Flame-spread rating of 75 or less and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less

Packaging Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation type and grade and maximum use temperature

105 COORDINATION

A Coordinate size and location of supports hangers

B Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application

C Coordinate adhesives and preparation of surfaces of exterior refrigerant piping with Coating Installer and ensure chemicals are properly selected

106 SCHEDULING

Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

A Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied

B Products shall not contain asbestos lead mercury or mercury compounds

C Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871

D Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795

E Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process

202 INSULATION MATERIALS

A Cellular Glass Inorganic incombustible foamed or cellulated glass with annealed rigid hermetically sealed cells Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Factory-Applied Jackets Article

1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following or Engineer Approved Equal

a Cell-U-Foam Corporation Ultra-CUF

b Pittsburgh Corning Corporation Foamglas Super K

2 Block Insulation ASTM C 552 Type I

3 Special-Shaped Insulation ASTM C 552 Type III

4 Board Insulation ASTM C 552 Type IV

5 Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ Comply with ASTM C 552 Type II Class 2

6 Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585

B Phenolic

a Kingspan Corp Koolphen K

2 Preformed pipe insulation of rigid expanded closed-cell structure Comply with ASTM C 1126 Type III Grade 1

3 Block insulation of rigid expanded closed-cell structure Comply with ASTM C 1126 Type II Grade 1

5 Factory-Applied Jacket Requirements are specified in Factory-Applied Jackets Article

a Preformed Pipe Insulation ASJ

C Flexible Elastomeric Closed-cell sponge- or expanded-rubber materials Comply with ASTM C 534 Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials

1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following

a Aeroflex USA Inc Aerocel

b Armacell LLC AP Armaflex

c RBX Corporation Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180

2 Adhesive As recommended by insulation material manufacturer

3 Ultraviolet-Protective Coating As recommended by insulation manufacturer

D Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover elbows and tees

203 ADHESIVES

A Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated

B Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Adhesive Solvent-based resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F

1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer

a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-96

b Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 81-33

c Engineer Approved Equal

C Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive Comply with MIL-A-24179A Type II Class I

a Aeroflex USA Inc Aeroseal

b Armacell LCC 520 Adhesive

c Foster Products Corporation H B Fuller Company 85-75

d RBX Corporation Rubatex Contact Adhesive

D PVC Jacket Adhesive Compatible with PVC jacket

1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following and as recommended by jacket material manufacturer

a Dow Chemical Company (The) 739 Dow Silicone

b Johns-Manville Zeston Perma-Weld CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive

c PIC Plastics Inc Welding Adhesive

d Red Devil Inc Celulon Ultra Clear

e Speedline Corporation Speedline Vinyl Adhesive

204 MASTICS

A Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates comply with MIL-C-19565C Type II

B Vapor-Barrier Mastic Water based suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services

c ITW TACC Division of Illinois Tool Works CB-50

d Marathon Industries Inc 590

e Mon-Eco Industries Inc 55-40

f Vimasco Corporation 749

2 Water-Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 Procedure B 0013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness

3 Service Temperature Range Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F

4 Solids Content ASTM D 1644 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight

5 Color White

C Breather Mastic Water based suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services

f Vimasco Corporation WC-1WC-5

2 Water-Vapor Permeance ASTM F 1249 3 perms at 00625-inch dry film thickness

4 Solids Content 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight

5 Color White

205 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A Description Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates

c Marathon Industries Inc 130

d Mon-Eco Industries Inc 11-30

e Vimasco Corporation 136

2 Fire-resistant water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct equipment and pipe insulation

4 Color White

206 SEALANTS

A Joint Sealants

1 Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following as recommended by the insulation manufacturer

e Pittsburgh Corning Corporation Pittseal 444

B Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants

a Childers Products Division of ITW CP-76-8

2 Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates

3 Fire- and water-resistant flexible elastomeric sealant

5 Color Aluminum

C ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants

5 Color White

207 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

ASJ White kraft-paper fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing complying with ASTM C 1136 Type I

208 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921 Type I unless otherwise indicated

B PVC Jacket High-impact-resistant UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784 Class 16354-C 30 mils thick roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules

a Johns Manville Zeston

b PIC Plastics Inc FG Series

c Proto PVC Corporation LoSmoke

d Speedline Corporation SmokeSafe

2 Adhesive As recommended by jacket material manufacturer

3 Color White

4 Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available otherwise field fabricate

a Shapes 45- and 90-degree short- and long-radius elbows tees valves flanges unions reducers end caps soil-pipe hubs traps mechanical joints and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories

C Aluminum Jacket Aluminum roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming or factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes Comply with ASTM B 209 3003 alloy H-14 temper

a Childers Products Division of ITW Metal Jacketing Systems

b PABCO Metals Corporation Surefit

c RPR Products Inc Insul-Mate

2 Finish and Thickness Stucco-embossed finish 0016 inch thick

3 Moisture Barrier 1-mil- thick heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper

4 Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers

a Same material finish and thickness as jacket

b Preformed 2-piece or gore 45- and 90-degree short- and long-radius elbows

c Tee covers

d Flange and union covers

e End caps

f Beveled collars

g Valve covers

h Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available

209 SECUREMENTS

A Bands

a Childers Products Bands

b PABCO Metals Corporation Bands

c RPR Products Inc Bands

2 Stainless Steel ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240A 240M Type 316 0015 inch thick 34 inch wide with wing seal

B Staples Outward-clinching insulation staples nominal 34-inch- wide stainless steel or Monel

C Wire 0062-inch soft-annealed stainless steel

a C amp F Wire

b Childers Products

c PABCO Metals Corporation

d RPR Products Inc

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application

302 PREPARATION

Surface Preparation Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application

303 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles

B Install insulation materials accessories and finishes with smooth straight and even surfaces free of voids throughout the length of equipment ducts and fittings and piping including fittings valves and specialties

C Install insulation materials forms vapor barriers or retarders jackets and thicknesses required for each pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules

D Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service Install accessories that do not corrode soften or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state

E Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs

F Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered

G Do not weld brackets clips or other attachment devices to piping fittings and specialties

H Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing

I Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer

J Install insulation with least number of joints practical

K Where vapor barrier is indicated seal joints seams and penetrations in insulation at hangers supports anchors and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic

1 Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments

2 For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic

3 Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer

4 Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation Install shields over jacket arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger support and shield

L Apply adhesives mastics and sealants at manufacturers recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses

M Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows

1 Draw jacket tight and smooth

2 Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips of same material as insulation jacket Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip spaced 4 inches oc

3 Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-12 inches Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches oc

a For below ambient services apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples

4 Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal

5 Where vapor barriers are indicated apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings

N Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness

O Insulation Installation on Fittings Valves Strainers Flanges and Unions

1 Install insulation over fittings valves strainers flanges unions and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated

2 Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive Fill joints seams voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth hard and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation

3 Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire Bond pieces with adhesive

4 Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker For valves insulate up to and including the bonnets valve stuffing-box studs bolts and nuts Fill joints seams and irregular surfaces with insulating cement

5 Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker Fill joints seams and irregular surfaces with insulating cement Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket Provide a removable reusable insulation cover For below ambient services provide a design that maintains vapor barrier

6 Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker

7 Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour

8 For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin install fitted PVC cover over elbows tees strainers valves flanges and unions Terminate ends with PVC end caps Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape

9 Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word UNION Match size and color of pipe labels

P Insulate instrument connections for thermometers pressure gages pressure temperature taps test connections flow meters sensors switches and transmitters on insulated pipes vessels and equipment Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement mastic and flashing sealant

Q Finish installation with systems at operating conditions Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement

R Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas Adhere staple and seal patches similar to butt joints

S For above ambient services do not install insulation to the following

1 Vibration-control devices

2 Testing agency labels and stamps

3 Nameplates and data plates

4 Manholes

5 Handholes

6 Cleanouts

304 PENETRATIONS

A Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated) Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions

B Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations

1 Pipe Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations

305 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

A Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes

1 Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials

2 Where vapor barriers are indicated seal longitudinal seams end joints and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant

3 For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches oc

4 For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant

B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges

1 Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange

2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation

3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation

4 Install jacket material with manufacturers recommended adhesive overlap seams at least 1 inch and seal joints with flashing sealant

C Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows

1 Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available Secure according to manufacturers written instructions

2 When preformed sections of insulation are not available install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation Secure insulation materials with bands

D Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties

1 Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body

2 Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation

3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application

306 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A General Installation Requirements

1 Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials

2 Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches Secure inner layer with 0062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals

B Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes

1 Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials

4 For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient services do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant

C Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges

3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation

D Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows

1 Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation Secure according to manufacturers written instructions

E Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties

307 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated

1 Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange

3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation

4 Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated

1 Install mitered sections of pipe insulation

2 Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated

1 Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available

2 When preformed valve covers are not available install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation

4 Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated

308 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A Where PVC jackets are indicated install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints for horizontal applications install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive

1 Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge

B Where metal jackets are indicated install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches oc and at end joints

309 FINISHES

A Refer to schedule at the end of this Specification for piping systems that require finish

B Pipe Insulation with ASJ Other Paintable Jacket Material Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in painting Sections

1 Flat Acrylic Finish Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof

a Finish Coat Material Interior flat latex-emulsion size

C Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation After adhesive has fully cured apply two coats of insulation manufacturers recommended protective coating

D Color

1 RenovationsAdditions to Existing Chilled and Hot Water Piping Match existing color

2 Other Piping Systems Final color as selected by Architect

E Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets

310 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section

B Items Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems materials and equipment

1 Refrigerant interior and exterior liquid lines except at wall penetrations as noted in drawings

A Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications

B Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications

312 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE GENERAL

A Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials vapor retarders and field-applied jackets

B Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range If more than one material is listed for a piping system selection from materials listed is Contractors option

C Items Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated do not install insulation on the following

1 Drainage piping located in crawl spaces

2 Underground piping

3 Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury

D Where interior or exterior piping is insulated apply same scheduled insulation system within pipe sleeve

313 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A Service Condensate drain and Sanitary Waste piping

1 Operating Temperature 35 to 75 deg F

2 Insulation Material Flexible elastomeric

3 Insulation Thickness 34

4 Field-Applied Jacket PVC

5 Finish None

B Service Refrigerant discharge (hot-gas) piping

4 Field-Applied Jacket None

5 Finish Manufacturers recommended protective coating

C Service Chilled Water Supply and Return

1 Operating Temperature 40 deg F and above

2 NPS 12 and Smaller Insulation shall be one of the following

a Cellular Glass 2 inches thick

b Phenolic 1-12 inches thick

4 Vapor-Barrier Mastic

5 Finish Custom color to match existing piping Provide two coats

D Service Heating Hot Water Supply and Return

1 Operating Temperature 200 deg F and below

4 Vapor-Barrier Breather mastic

314 OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building

B Service Condensate drain piping

4 Field-Applied Jacket Aluminum

C Service Refrigerant liquid and discharge (hot-gas)

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15183 ndash Page 1 of 5 Refrigerant Piping

SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications

B Related Sections include the following

1 Division 16 Section for supports and installation requirements

102 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated Include pressure drop based on manufacturers test data and pressure-regulating valves

C Shop Drawings Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties including pipe tube and fitting sizes flow capacities valve arrangements and locations slopes of horizontal runs oil traps double risers wall penetrations and equipment connection details Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment

1 Refrigerant piping drawings are schematic only Size piping and design the actual piping layout including oil traps double risers specialties and pipe and tube sizes to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment

D Welding Certificates Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel

E Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements

F Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

A Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications

B ASHRAE Standard Comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

C ASME Standard Comply with ASME B315 Refrigeration Piping

D UL Standard Provide products complying with UL 207 Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories Nonelectrical or UL 429 Electrically Operated Valves

104 COORDINATION

A Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with other construction

B Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls

C Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections

105 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents

1 Refrigeration Oil Test Kits Two each containing everything required to conduct one test

2 Refrigerant Four (4) containers each with 20 lb of refrigerant

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following or approved equal

1 Refrigerants

a Allied Signal IncFluorine Products Genetron Refrigerants

b DuPont Company Fluorochemicals Div

c Elf Atochem North America Inc Fluorocarbon Div

d ICI Americas IncICI KLEA Fluorochemicals Bus

2 Refrigerant Valves and Specialties

a Climate amp Industrial Controls Group Parker-Hannifin Corp Refrigeration amp Air Conditioning Division

b Danfoss Electronics Inc

c Emerson Electric Company Alco Controls Div

d Henry Valve Company

e Sporlan Valve Company

202 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A Hard Drawn Rigid Copper Tube ASTM B 280 Type ACR

B Wrought-Copper Fittings ASME B1622

C Wrought-Copper Unions ASME B1622

D Braze Filler Metal Copper-Phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A58 BCuP-5 (15 Silver 5 Phosphor and remaining Copper)

203 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures

B Two-Piece Copper-Alloy Ball Valves Suitable for R-407C and pressure rating of system Brass or bronze body with full or regular-port chrome-plated bronze ball PTFE or TFE seats and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem

204 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A Body Tin-bronze bellows with woven flexible tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket

B End Connections Socket ends

C Offset Performance Capable of minimum 34-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-long assembly

D Working Pressure Rating Factory test at minimum 500 psig

E Maximum Operating Temperature 250 deg F

205 REFRIGERANTS

A ASHRAE 34 R-407C DifluoromethanePentafluoroethane1112-Tetrafluoroethane

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PIPING APPLICATIONS

Aboveground exterior and within Building Type ACR hard drawn-copper tubing

302 PIPING INSTALLATION

A Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15

B Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods

C Install piping as short and direct as possible with a minimum number of joints elbows and fittings Refer to drawings for general proposed piping route

D Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection

E Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation Use sleeves through walls sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation

F Slope refrigerant piping as follows

1 Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor

2 Liquid lines may be installed level

G When brazing remove valve stems seats and packing and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties Do not apply heat near expansion valve bulb

H Install flexible connectors where shown on PLANS

Install copper-alloy shut-off valve in refrigerant liquid line of each ACU refrigerant circuit Shut-off valves shall be located inside building as shown in drawings

304 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A Braze joints according to Division 15 Section General HVAC Systems Materials and Methods

B Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent scale formation

A Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B315 Chapter VI

1 Test refrigerant piping specialties and receivers Isolate compressor condenser evaporator and safety devices from test pressure

2 Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system

a System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test

b Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution over joint

c Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required by authorities having jurisdiction

d Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are achieved

306 ADJUSTING

A Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements

B Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure

C Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature

D Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system according to manufacturers written instructions (Coordinate with ACU manufacturerrsquos checklist)

1 Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass

2 Open compressor suction and discharge valves

3 Check compressor-motor alignment and lubricate motors and bearings

307 CLEANING

Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene

308 SYSTEM CHARGING

A Charge system using the following procedures

1 Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers If vacuum holds for 12 hours system is ready for charging

2 Break vacuum with refrigerant gas allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig

3 Charge system Provide full-operating charge

B If manufacturerrsquos recommended charging parameters differ from parameters stated herein the stricter parameter shall be implemented

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15184 ndash Page 1 of 7 Copper Pipe and Accessories

SECTION 15184

COPPER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section

102 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data For the following products

1 Piping and fittings

2 Transition fittings

3 Strainer

A Piping materials shall bear label stamp or other markings of specified testing agency

B Comply with NSF 61 for potable water piping and components

A Interruption of Existing Water Service Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated

1 Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service

2 Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owners written permission

105 COORDINATION

Coordinate routes of piping and installation with existing conditions other trades especially electrical and control trades

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Hard Copper Tube ASTM B 88 Type K water tube drawn temper

1 Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings ASME B1618 pressure fittings

2 Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings ASME B1622 wrought-copper pressure fittings

3 Bronze Flanges ASME B1624 Class 150 raise faced with solder-joint ends NIBCO 771 or Engineer Approved equal

a Flange shall be joined as brazed not soldered Refer to Execution section of this section

4 Copper Unions MSS SP-123 cast-copper-alloy hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends

202 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials AWWA C110 rubber flat face 18 inch thick or ASME B1621 nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated

B Metal Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts ASME stainless steel unless otherwise indicated

C Brazing Filler Metals AWS A58A58M BCuP Series copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated

D Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping ASTM D 2564 Include primer according to ASTM F 656

203 VALVES

A Refer to PLANS for valve types and requirements

B Refer to Division 15 Section Valves for general valve requirements

204 STRAINER

Bronze body 125 PSI rated Y-Pattern strainer with threaded end connections stainless steel screen with 0020 inch round perforations and drain pipe plug

205 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A General Requirements

1 Same size as pipes to be joined

2 Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined

3 End connections compatible with pipes to be joined

B Fitting-Type Transition Couplings Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting

C Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions

1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following

a Colonial Engineering Inc

b NIBCO INC

c Spears Manufacturing Company

2 Description PVC four-part union Include brass threaded end solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end rubber O-ring and union nut

206 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A General Requirements Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature

B Dielectric Unions

a Capitol Manufacturing Company

b Hart Industries International Inc

c Watts Regulator Co a division of Watts Water Technologies Inc

2 Factory-fabricated union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F

C Dielectric-Flange Kits

a Advance Products amp Systems Inc

b Calpico Inc

c Central Plastics Company

d Drake Specialties

e Pipeline Seal and Insulator Inc

2 Description

a Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges

b Pressure Rating 150 psig

c Gasket neoprene

d Bolt Sleeves polyethylene

e Washers phenolic with steel backing washers

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Applications

1 Blower Cooling Water Piping Copper piping shall have brazed joint connections Provide flanges where shown on the PLANS and flange connections flanged valves and instrumentselements Provide threaded copper connection only at connections to threaded instruments

2 Tank Make-Up Water Piping Copper piping shall be have solder joint connections Provide threaded copper connections at valves accessories and instruments

3 Seal Water Piping Copper piping shall be have solder joint connections Provide threaded copper connections at valves accessories and instruments

B Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings

C Provide soldiered cast copper reducing fittings to reduce from 3rdquo to 2-12rdquo or 2rdquo as required between proposed pipeinstrumentvalve flange and proposedexisting pipe Field verify existing pipe size for each blower system installation

D Install domestic piping level and plumb

E Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls

F Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance

G Install piping to permit valve servicing

H Install nipples unions special fittings and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated

I Install piping free of sags and bends

J Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections

K Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment machine specialty and as indicated on PLANS

302 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe

B Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipes tubes and fittings before assembly

C Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1201 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows

1 Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads

2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged

D Brazed Joints Join copper tube and fittings according to CDAs Copper Tube Handbook Brazed Joints Chapter

E Flanged Joints Select appropriate asbestos-free nonmetallic gasket material in size type and thickness suitable for service Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B319

F Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints Clean and dry joining surfaces Join pipe and fittings according to the following

1 Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners primers and solvent cements Apply primer

2 CPVC Piping Join according to ASTM D 2846D 2846M Appendix

3 PVC Piping Join according to ASTM D 2855

G Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems

303 VALVE INSTALLATION

Refer to PLANS for locations Valves shall be full port and same size as line served

304 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

Install dielectric fittings and flange kits in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing

A Refer to PLANS for required hangers and support requirements

B For cooling water piping inside Blower enclosure use existing pipe support system for renovatednew piping systems

C Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturers written instructions

306 CONNECTIONS

A Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties

B Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance

C Install flow elements sight flow indicators and other instruments as shown on PLANS and noted in other specification sections in piping systems Refer to Specification Section 17380 for description of additional instruments installed in piping system

307 FINISH

Refer to Section 09900 for painting and protective coating requirements Refer to PLANS for additional painting requirements of piping systems

A Perform the following tests

1 Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired If testing is performed in segments submit a separate report for each test complete with diagram of portion of piping tested

2 Leave new altered extended or replaced piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested

3 Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained

4 Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required

309 CLEANING

Clean interior of piping system Remove dirt and debris as work progresses Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired before using Flush piping system with clean potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets

310 PIPING SCHEDULE

Refer to PLANS piping locations sizes and applications

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15500 ndash Page 1 of 13 General HVAC Systems Harutunian Engineering Inc TBPE Firm F-2408 Materials and Methods

SECTION 15500

GENERAL HVAC SYSTEMS MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections associated with the HVAC systems as shown on the HVAC portion of the PLANS

1 Condensate and Overflow Drain piping materials and installation instructions

2 Dielectric fittings

3 Mechanical sleeve seals

4 Vibration isolation pads

5 Corrosion resistant pipe coating

6 Equipment nameplate requirements

7 Concrete Bases

8 Nonshrink grout for sleeve installations

9 Supports and Hangers

10 Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections

11 Cutting and patching

12 Touchup painting and finishing

102 DEFINITIONS

A Exposed Interior Installations Exposed to view indoors Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms

B Exposed Exterior Installations Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions Examples include rooftop locations

C Designation Abbreviated names of equipment as listed in equipment schedule on the PLANS

D Tagging Number Equipment tagging number as listed in mechanical equipment schedule on the PLANS

103 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data For dielectric fittings mechanical sleeve seals vibration isolation pads pipe tube fittings and couplings and identification materials and devices

C Shop Drawings Mechanical fastening of condensing unit and scrubber unit Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications

D Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements

E Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

A Manufacturers Written Recommendations for Coatings Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for applying and curing high-temperature-resistant coatings Do not apply coatings until these conditions have been attained and stabilized

B Do not apply coatings in snow rain fog or mist when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent at temperatures less than 5 deg F above dew point or to damp or wet surfaces

1 Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with coating operation

2 Coating application may continue during inclement weather only if surfaces to be coated are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and curing periods

A Comply with Uniform Mechanical Code and Uniform Plumbing Code and current City of Austin amendments thereof for all installations

B Comply with ASME A131 for lettering size length of color field colors and viewing angles of identification devices

C Comply with the requirements of NEMA OSHA NEC and all building codes Design construct assemble and test in accordance with AISC AISI ASTM NEMA IEEE UL and ANSI standards

D Equipment Selection Equipment of higher electrical characteristics physical dimensions capacities and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by Engineer and connecting mechanical and electrical services circuit breakers conduit motors bases and equipment spaces are increased Additional costs if any shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases If energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements of specified equipment

E Piping materials shall bear label stamp or other markings of specified testing agency

A All materials and equipment shall be environmentally protected and stored in climate controlled (temperature and humidity etc) environment

B Interior and exterior of the equipment shall be kept clean at all times

C Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground

D Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps Maintain end caps through shipping storage and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt debris and moisture

E Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt Elevate above grade Do not exceed structural capacity of floor if stored inside

F Protect flanges fittings and piping specialties from moisture and dirt

G Coatings

1 Deliver coating materials to the Project site in the manufacturers original unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturers name and label and the following information

a Product name or title of material

b Product description (generic classification or binder type)

c Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture

d Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents

e Application instructions

f Color name and number

g VOC content

h Handling instructions and precautions

2 Store coating materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area protected from sunlight and weather at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F and a maximum ambient temperature of 110 deg F Maintain storage containers in a clean condition free of foreign materials and residue Follow coating manufacturersrsquo safety guidelines

a Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily Take necessary measures to ensure workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling mixing and applying coatings

107 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components

B Arrange for pipe spaces slots and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations

C Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed

D Sequence coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building

E Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services Comply with requirements of governing regulations franchised service companies and controlling agencies

F Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 PRIMARY AND OVERFLOW CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A Definitions

1 Primary Condensate Drain Piping Piping connected directly to main unit condensate pan and conveys condensate to designated drain via an indirect waste connection

2 Overflow Condensate Drain Piping Piping connected directly to overflow condensate pan and conveys condensate to designated drain via an indirect waste connection

B Materials

1 Exterior (outdoor) piping and piping in exterior wall penetrations

a Hard drawn rigid ASTM Type L Copper tubing with threaded wrought copper fittings

2 Interior (indoor) condensate piping

a General Schedule 40 PVC with threaded PVC fittings

b Operations Building Hard drawn rigid ASTM Type L Copper tubing with threaded wrought copper fittings

202 PIPE FITTING MANUFACTURERS

1 Dielectric Unions

a Capitol Manufacturing Co

b Central Plastics Co

c Eclipse Inc Rockford-Eclipse Div

d Epco Sales Inc

e Hart Industries International Inc

f Watts Industries Inc Water Products Div

g Zurn Industries Inc Wilkins Div

2 Dielectric Couplings

a Calpico Inc

b Lochinvar Corp

3 Dielectric Nipples

a Grinnell Corp Grinnell Supply Sales Co

b Perfection Corp

c Victaulic Co of America

A General Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion

B Description Combination of copper alloy and ferrous threaded solder plain and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials

C Insulating Material Suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature

D Dielectric Unions Factory-fabricated union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F

E Dielectric Couplings Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F

F Dielectric Nipples Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining plain threaded or grooved ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F

204 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A Sleeves The following materials are for wall floor slab and roof penetrations

1 ASTM A554-94 stainless-steel tubing ASME A11231 stainless-steel piping or engineer approved 316 Stainless Steel pipe or tubing

B Escutcheons Manufactured wall ceiling and floor plates deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves

1 ID Closely fit around pipe tube and insulation of insulated piping

2 OD Completely cover opening

3 Cast Brass Split casting with concealed hinge and set screw

a Finish Polished chrome-plate

205 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A Manufacturers or approved equal

1 AmberBooth Company Inc

2 Isolation Technology Inc

3 Vibration Isolation Co Inc

B Neoprene Isolator Pads Oil- and water-resistant neoprene arranged in single or multiple layers molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment Baseplates shall be located between neoprene and isolated equipment

206 CORROSION RESISTANT PIPE COATING

A Provide specified coating materials or approved equal by following manufacturers

1 Carboline Company (Carboline)

2 Devoe Coatings Company (Devoe)

3 DuPont Company (DuPont)

4 Glidden Co (The) (Glidden)

5 Benjamin Moore amp Co (Moore)

6 Porter International (Porter)

7 PPG Industries Inc (PPG)

8 Rust-Oleum Corporation (R-O)

9 Tnemec Company Inc (Tnemec)

B Provide Rust-Oleum 9100 System or approved equal white colored coating system as follows

1 Activator Rust-Oleum 9101 or approved equal activator

2 Base Rust-Oleum 9192 or approved equal white colored base

207 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A General Manufacturers standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections If more than one type is specified for application selection is Installers option but provide one selection for each product category

B Equipment Nameplates Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped permanently fastened to equipment

1 Data Manufacturer product name model number serial number capacity operating and power characteristics labels of tested compliances and similar essential data

2 Location Accessible and visible location

C Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers Manufacturers standard preprinted semirigid snap on color-coded complying with ASME A131 Pipe markers installed in exterior areas shall be coated and treated to help withstand direct sun exposure and help prevent fading of print

D Plastic Duct Markers Manufacturers standard color-coded laminated plastic Comply with the following color code

1 YellowGreen or Green Supply air

2 Blue Fresh Air

3 Nomenclature Include the following

a Supply or Fresh Air

b Direction of airflow

E Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs ASTM D 709 Type I cellulose paper-base phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock Grade ES-2 black surface black phenolic core with white melamine subcore unless otherwise indicated

1 Fabricate in sizes required for message

2 Engraved with engravers standard letter style of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification

3 Punch for mechanical fastening

4 Thickness 18 inch unless otherwise indicated

5 Fasteners Self-tapping stainless-steel screws

F Lettering and Graphics Coordinate names abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated Use numbers (tagging-system) and wording indicated for proper identification and operationmaintenance of mechanical systems and equipment

208 CONCRETE BASES

A Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturers written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project

1 Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit

2 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor Unless otherwise indicated install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base

3 Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor

4 Place and secure anchorage devices Use supported equipment manufacturers setting drawings templates diagrams instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded

5 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment

6 Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturers written instructions

7 Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section

209 GROUT

A Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout ASTM C 1107 Grade B

1 Characteristics Post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cement grout nonstaining noncorrosive nongaseous and recommended for interior and exterior applications

2 Design Mix 5000-psig 28-day compressive strength

3 Packaging Premixed and factory packaged

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A General Install piping as described below unless piping Sections specify otherwise Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements

B General Locations and Arrangements Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems

C Provide support structures for piping Refer to Division 16 for acceptable support materials and structures

D Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure

E Install piping free of sags and bends

F Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated

G Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation

H Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other spaced to permit valve servicing

I Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections

J Install couplings according to manufacturers written instructions

K Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls according to the following

1 Cast brass with concealed hinge spring clips and chrome-plated finish

L Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs as shown on the PLANS

1 Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces

2 Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses

a Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink nonmetallic grout

3 Except for underground wall penetrations seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using elastomeric joint sealants Use Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use O neutral-curing silicone sealant unless otherwise indicated

M Piping Joint Construction Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections

1 Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe

2 Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly

3 Soldered Joints Construct joints according to AWSs Soldering Manual Chapter The Soldering of Pipe and Tube or CDAs Copper Tube Handbook

4 Brazed Joints Construct joints according to AWSs Brazing Handbook Chapter Pipe and Tube

5 Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1201 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows

a Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends and proximity of internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint

b Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified

c Align threads at point of assembly

d Tighten joint with wrench Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded

e Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds

6 Welded Joints Construct joints according to AWS D1012 Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe using qualified processes and welding operators according to Quality Assurance Article

N Piping Connections Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated

1 Install unions in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection

2 Dry Piping Systems Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals

3 Wet Piping Systems Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals

302 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom if mounting heights are not indicated

B Install equipment according to approved submittal data Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form Refer conflicts to Engineer

C Install equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated

D Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations Extend grease fittings to accessible locations

E Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope

A Provide pipe coating to all exterior refrigerant copper piping between condensing unit and air conditioning unit Provide three (3) coats of specified coating

B Provide pipe coating to all manufacturer installed condensing unit copper piping external to unit casing (if any) Take caution not to damage or prevent proper function of components within condensing unit Provide three (3) coats of specified coating

C Surface Preparation Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturers written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified

D Material Preparation Mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturers written instructions

1 Maintain containers used for mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition free of foreign materials and residue

2 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during application Do not stir surface film into material If necessary remove surface film and strain coating material before using

3 Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits

E General Apply coatings by brush roller spray or other applicators according to the manufacturers written instructions Use applicators and techniques best suited for material being applied

1 Do not apply coatings over dirt rust scale grease moisture scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film

2 Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats to permit proper curing Do not recoat until coating has dried so it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where applying another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion

F Minimum Coating Thickness Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturers recommended spreading rate Provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by the manufacturer

G Cleanup At the end of each workday remove rubbish empty cans rags and other discarded coating materials from the Project site

1 After completing coating application clean spattered surfaces Remove spattered coatings by washing scraping or other methods Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces

304 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A Piping Systems Install pipe markers on each system Include arrows showing normal direction of flow

1 Plastic markers with application systems

a Provide at least one marker on exterior and one marker on interior run of pipe

B Equipment Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on Air Conditioning Units (ACU) Air Handling Units (AHU) Scrubbers and Condensing Units (CU)

1 Lettering Size 12-inch- high lettering for designation of unit 38-inch-high lettering for unit tagging number

C Duct Systems Identify Scrubber Unit air supply and intake ducts with duct markers showing direction of flow Signs are not required for ACU or AHU ductwork

D Adjusting Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction

305 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Damage and Touchup Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish

306 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A Cut channel chase and drill floors walls partitions ceilings and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved

B Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces

307 GROUTING

A Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout

B Provide forms as required for placement of grout

C Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout

D Cure placed grout according to manufacturers written instructions

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15780 ndash Page 1 of 11 Scrubbers

SECTION 15780

SCRUBBERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes the Scrubber units as designated on the PLANS Each Scrubber unit is a factory-fabricated air-filter device with media used to remove gaseous and particulate matter from the air

B Furnish all labor materials equipment and incidentals required to provide and make ready for operation the Scrubber Units as specified herein

C Provide corrosion coupon testing services per the Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standard 7104 Services shall consist of six (6) site visits for over a period of two (2) years after the final completion of the project and associated coupons and test reports as specified herein

102 GENERAL SCRUBBER UNIT DESCRIPTION

A Each Scrubber Unit shall provide particulate pre-filtration two (2) stages of gaseous carbon media filtration and particulate final-filtration

B Each Positive Pressurization Unit (PPU) Scrubber Unit shall provide internal re-circulated and positive pressurization air flow rates as shown on the PLANS

103 RELATED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A PLANS designate type number size and capacity of equipment included in the Scrubber Unit

B Comply with the Division-15 requirements of the Contract Specifications and HVAC PLANS

C Comply with the Division-16 requirements of the Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

104 DEFINITIONS

C Designation Abbreviated names of equipment as listed in equipment schedule shown on the PLANS

105 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

A Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications As a minimum shop drawings data shall also include the requirements of this Subsection of the Contract Specifications

B As minimum the Scrubber Unit Product Data shall also include

1 Fan type and drive

2 Fan curves

3 Rated flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow

4 Efficiency and test method

5 Motor information

6 Fire classification

7 Vibration isolation

8 Sound power levels

9 Filter information including weight initial resistance and recommended final resistance at air flows indicated on the PLANS for each filter and media

C As minimum the submittal drawings shall also include

1 Detailed equipment assemblies Include plan views elevation views sectional views and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments including but not limited to supply and return grilles access doors pressure ports filters blower etc

2 For each field assembled component of the unit provide component dimensions component installed weight component operating weight component required clearances component method of field assembly

3 Detail differential pressure port mounting locations

4 Detailed point-to-point wiring diagrams for power process signal and instrumentation and control systems Wiring diagrams shall clearly differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed interface wiring

5 Bill of materials and catalog cut sheets on all materials

6 Final as-built drawings and information for all items and components installed each Scrubber Unit

D General

Items which are manufactured by others shall have the original manufacturerrsquos name complete catalog number and descriptive data as well as detailed product cut-sheets

106 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications At minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this Subsection of the Contract Specifications

B As minimum the content of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall also include

1 Equipment function normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions

2 Assembly installation alignment adjustment and checking instructions

3 Operating instructions for start-up and testing routine and normal operation regulation and control shutdown and emergency conditions

4 Lubrication and maintenance instructions

5 Guide to ldquotroubleshootingrdquo

6 Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear

7 Outline cross section and assembly drawings engineering data and wiring diagrams

8 Test data and performance curves

9 Scrubber Unit Certified Production Test Reports and Installation information

10 Media sampling (coupon) results and reports Provide a section for entry of forthcoming media sampling reports and proposed media replacement frequency

11 Corrosion Coupon Testing Schedule

a The Contractor shall develop a media sampling schedule upon acceptance by the Owner (upon the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) and submit to the Owner for review and comment

b The schedule shall include dates on which corrosion coupons are installed old coupons removed and dates by which results of corrosion test are submitted to Owner

c The Contractor shall adhere to the submitted scheduled dates of corrosion coupon placementsremovals and analysis submission dates

12 Approved and corrected copy of the shop drawing submittal data

107 SCRUBBER UNIT WARRANTY

The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment furnished will be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications If within 24 months after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the equipment or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner Any repairs or replacement parts furnished under the above stated warranty shall carry warranties of the same terms as set forth above from the date of its repair or replacement Cost of Travel lodging labor and parts required as a result of any Warranty Work shall be covered by the warranty (the Manufacturer) All warranty services shall be provided by direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician

A Product Options PLANS indicate size profiles and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated Other manufacturers systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered

B Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B

C ASHRAE Compliance Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 521 for method of testing and rating air-filter units

D Comply with Uniform Mechanical Code and current City of Austin amendments thereof for all installations

E Comply with the requirements of NEMA OSHA NEC and all building codes Design construct assemble and test in accordance with AISC AISI ASTM NEMA IEEE UL and ANSI standards

F Equipment Selection Equipment of higher electrical characteristics physical dimensions capacities and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by Engineer and connecting mechanical and electrical services circuit breakers conduitwiring motors instrumentation and control system and associated conduitwiring bases electrical and mechanical system protection level and equipment spaces are increased Additional costs if any shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases If energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements of specified equipment

109 DESIGN CRITERIA

A Furnish factory fabricated packaged air filtration unit complete with fans motors drives filter sections and access sections meeting the configuration shown on the PLANS andor as scheduled

B Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110 of air quantity scheduled at scheduled static pressure The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions

110 SPECIAL MANUFACTURERrsquoS SERVICES

A Furnish the services of a qualified experienced direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to provide on-site assistance in the installation of the equipment Include checking alignment of parts wiring connections operation of all parts (blower belt motor vibration isolation mixing damper return air damper filters filter racks etc) Include time to correct and recheck any discrepancies which are discovered Also include providing the Owner with copies of a report certifying that the equipment was installed properly tested and set in accordance with the Contract Specifications and is in satisfactory operating condition Reports format and quantity shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications

B Any problems encountered with the operation of equipment parts components etc installed within the Scrubber Unit shall be repairedremedied by the manufacturerrsquos technical representative

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

A There shall be furnished as shown on the plans self-contained air purification machines as designated on the PLANS as manufactured by Purafil Inc Norcross Georgia USA or Engineer approved equal

B Provide quantities of Scrubber Units and configurationslocations of accessories and connections for each Scrubber Unit as shown on the PLANS

C Each Scrubber shall be installed with the direction of airflow as shown on the PLANS each with two (2) passes of adsorptive media The Scrubber shall be constructed with a contaminant control system consisting of four stages and include an integral blower

D The four stages within each unit shall be as scheduled on the PLANS

202 VERTICAL PPU SCRUBBER

A Quantity and tagging as scheduled on PLANS

B The vertical P P U shall be arranged for vertical down-flow The return and outside air shall travel from the top of the unit to the bottom of the unit

C There shall be gasketed front access doors for servicing all components

D All stages shall be arranged to prevent air bypass

E There shall be grille covered openings in the top front of the unit arranged to accept return air from the ventilated space The return grilles shall be sized to provide an inlet air flow speed of no greater than 500 feet per minute when the unit is operating at the design specified total volumetric air flow conditions

1 Provide an aluminum opposed blade damper on the inside neck of each return air grille Damper shall be extruded aluminum with 1 maximum blade width positioned horizontally Where grille is 8 high damper shall have eight (8) blades

2 Provide Aluminum manual locking hand quadrant for each return air opposed blade damper Locate hand quadrant at the exterior of the unit as shown on the PLANS

F There shall be grille covered openings in the top front of the unit arranged to accept return air from the ventilated space The return grilles shall be sized to provide an inlet air flow speed of no greater than 500 feet per minute when the unit is operating at the design specified total volumetric air flow conditions

G The pressurization (outside) air shall enter the damper section through an opening located at the top of the unit Refer to the PLANS for the required size and location of the pressurization air opening The opening shall be centered along the depth of the unit Carefully coordinate location of opening with installer prior to fabrication

H The supply air shall discharge to the side of the unit near the bottom of the unit as shown on the PLANS Refer to PLANS for orientation size and location of the side discharge air opening

I MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

1 The housing shall be constructed of 14 GA 316 Stainless Steel with continuous seam welded corners

2 The components of all air cleaning stages shall be supported and retained with extruded aluminum (6063-T5) track securely attached to the housing Isolate aluminum from steel to prevent galvanic corrosion All track shall contain an integral sealing material

3 The unit shall be provided with gasketed front access door(s) for servicing all components Latches shall have a positive locking action sufficient to secure the door compress the gasket and preclude air bypass around the air cleaning stages All hinges and draw latches shall be constructed of stainless steel

4 A stainless steel nameplate shall be provided permanently attached to the unit Nameplate shall be engraved with the scrubber type order number and serial number

J BLOWER

1 The blower shall be a constant speed unit The unit shall not include an internal startercontrols All starters and controls shall be installed external to the unit and provided under separate specification section(s)

2 The unit shall NOT include a variable frequency drive Where a standard unit includes a variable frequency drive manufacturer shall remove the drive and wire the blower for standard on-site field wiring to external starter and control devices

3 The PPU Blower shall be located in the housing between the second and third stages of air cleaning

4 The blower shall have a backward curved airfoil Glass Reinforced Polymide wheel and be direct driven by a motor

5 The blower system shall provide 05rdquo IWG external static pressure at the design airflow

6 Blower motor shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) high efficiency rated Class F Insulation with internal overload protection and with a 115 service factor

7 Blower motor power and electrical service shall be as scheduled on the PLANS

8 The blower shall be spring and neoprene isolated from housing for quiet operation

9 Refer to PLANS for blower schedule

203 UNIT VIBRATION ISOLATORS

2 B-Line Systems Inc

B Neoprene Isolator Pads Amber Booth SP-NR Type E or Engineer Approved Equal Oil- and water-resistant neoprene arranged in multiple layers molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area and factory cut Each pad size shall be 6rdquo x 6rdquo minimum

C Refer to the PLANS for numberarrangement per equipment

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Furnish the services of a direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to assist and supervise in the installation of the equipment connections and adjustments start-up and testing of the Scrubber Unit components contained therein Also refer to the requirements of ldquoSpecial Manufacturerrsquos Servicesldquo Subsection in this section of the Contract Specifications Include time to correct any defects or malfunctions

302 MANUFACTURERrsquoS CERTIFICATION

A The manufacturer shall provide a report certifying in writing that the equipment has been installed adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturerrsquos recommendations and are in proper working order

B Format and number of copies of Certification Reports shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications Also refer to ldquoSpecial Manufacturerrsquos Servicesldquo Subsection in this section of the Contract Specifications

303 EXAMINATION

A Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

B Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics

304 INSTALLATION

A General

1 Install unit on neoprene pads Provide six (6) minimum pads each pad 6rdquox6rdquo Locate three (3) pads and in front portion of unit and three (3) at rear of unit Refer to the PLANS Verify pad size and loading with pad manufacturer and equipment weight

2 Install unit in accordance with the PLANS and in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions

3 Install equipment according to approved submittal data Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form Refer conflicts to Engineer

4 Install equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated

5 Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations

B Electrical Wiring

1 Refer to and comply with the electrical requirements of the PLANS and Division 16 Contract Specifications

2 Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted

C Fire Alarm System Connections

1 Coordinate with the Fire Alarm System installer and installconnect all cableselements with the Fire Alarm System for the properrequired monitoring and shutdown of equipment

2 Furnish copy of manufacturerrsquos connection diagram submittal to the Fire Alarm System installer as required for this Work

3 Refer to the Fire Alarm System specifications for additional requirements

305 REPLACEMENT ITEMS

A For each scheduled unit furnish the following extra replacement materials to Owner as described below that match products installed are packaged with protective covering for storage and are identified with labels describing contents

1 Three (3) sets of fan belts

2 Three (3) sets of replacement pre-filters

3 Three (3) sets of replacement media modules

4 Three (3) sets of replacement final-filters

306 CLEANING

After completing system installation and testing adjusting and balancing air-handling and air-distribution systems clean filter housings and install a new set of pre-filters and final-filters

308 COMMISSIONING

A After installation check the following

1 Components are not damaged

2 Unit is level

3 Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly

4 Ductwork is connected

5 Bearings are lubricated

6 Filters are installed and clean

7 Provide performance test and ensure unit performs as specified herein and as per manufacturerrsquos instructions

B Start unit according to manufacturers written instructions

C Complete manufacturers startup checks

309 TRAINING

A Provide 6 hours of training session for up to eight (8) ownerrsquos representatives at the job-site location andor at a location determined by the owner

B The training session shall be conducted by the same direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician who performed the field installation assistance and start-upsettingadjustment services

C At minimum the training session shall include

1 Operation and maintenance procedure for the equipment and all components contained within the Scrubber Unit

2 Means of proper storing handling replacinginstalling and disposing of filter media within unit

3 Procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown troubleshooting servicing and preventive maintenance

4 Coordination of analytical services to be performed by Scrubber Unit manufacturer

D Factory contact persons phone numbers persons names ordering procedures and procedures to follow to obtain meaningful results from the factory

310 ANALYTICAL SERVICES

A The following analytical services shall be provided for each of the scheduled Scrubber Units

B The Scrubber Manufacturer shall provide laboratory analysis services of coupon media per Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standard 7104 to comply with class G1 per ISA 7104 especially in regards to corrosion from Hydrogen Sulfide Analysis documents shall include corrosion rate (mils per year) method for determining ISA G1 requirements

C Provide one (1) media analysis check and analysis report at four (4) month intervals for two (2) years for each scheduled Scrubber Unit after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) for a total of six (6) media checks per scheduled unit After placed each coupon shall have an exposure period of (60) days plus or minus 10 days

D Each media coupon shall consist of a copper and silver strip At request of Owner Contractor shall provide all remaining coupons required for above testing in sealed and labeled wrappings at any point within the two year (2) period

E Contact Owner five (5) working days minimum prior to arriving at site to coordinate facility access for each scheduled visit Provide all required labor and expenses at no additional cost to the Owner for the placement retrieval and shipping of all coupons at the locations duration and intervals specified herein

F Provide the following number of coupons for each of the six (6) media analysis checks

1 One (1) media coupon in the discharge plenum of each scheduled Scrubber Unit

2 One (1) media coupon in the outside air duct of each scheduled PPU Scrubber Unit (not required for Recirculation Scrubber Units)

3 One (1) media coupon affixed in the room housing the Scrubber Unit(s) and located far from the scrubber system Locate coupon in an area away from human contact and at 60rdquo above finished floor Provide a sign with one-half inch lettering and located near coupon that states ldquoCORROSION COUPON IN PLACE PLEASE DO NO TOUCHrdquo

G Each Media Analysis Report shall include the following information

1 The exposure start date and removal date of each coupon

2 Proper regression per ISA Standard 7104 to equate to the 30 day exposure period for each coupon

3 Determine the corrosivity of the air supplied by the scrubber system and compare to class G1 ISA 7104 requirements

4 Determine the corrosivity of the air in the room and compare to class G1 ISA 7104 requirements

5 The exposure start date and removal date of each adsorptive media filter

6 Trend the corrosivity of coupons over time (per test) for each area

7 Expected date for replacement of media in each Scrubber Unit

H Submit each media check report manual per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications As minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications

I Coordinate with the Owner to log replacement dates of adsorptive media filters

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15783 ndash Page 1 of 24 Control-Room Air-Conditioning Units

SECTION 15783

CONTROL-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes air-conditioning units (intended specifically for control-room applications in a vertical air flow arrangement) equipment internalexternal accessories and mechanical connections (condensate drain pan and drain piping)

B Furnish all labor materials equipment and incidentals required to provide and make ready for operation the split system air cooled controlcomputer-room grade Air Conditioning Units and associated Condensing Units as specified herein and as scheduled on the PLANS

C The Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Units shall be used as the means to provide temperature and humidity control

A PLANS designate type number size and capacity of equipment included in the Air Conditioning Units and Condensing Units

D Comply with the requirements of Division 17 of the Contract Specifications and instrumentation PLANS

A Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for review per the requirements of Section 01300 of the Contract Specifications As a minimum shop drawings data shall also include the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications

B As minimum the Product Data shall also include

1 Equipment Product Data Include rated capacities materials of construction fan curves fan type and drive motor information internal vibration isolation coil performance data sound power levels filter information furnished specialties and accessories

C As minimum the Drawings shall also include

1 Equipment Shop Drawings

a Detailed equipment assemblies Include plan views elevation views sectional views and details to illustrate component assemblies and attachments

b For each field assembled component of the unit provide component dimensions component installed weight component operating weight component required clearances component method of field assembly

c Refrigerant Product Data For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated Include pressure drop based on manufacturers test data solenoid valves and pressure-regulating valves

d Setting adjustments templates and other requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages

e Detailed point-to-point wiring diagrams for power process signal and instrumentation and control systems Wiring diagrams shall clearly differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed interface wiring

3 Final as-built drawings and information for all items and components installed in the Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit

F General Items which are manufactured by others shall have the original manufacturerrsquos name complete catalog number and descriptive data as well as detailed product cut-sheets

104 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications As minimum the manuals shall be inclusive of the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications

3 Operating instructions for start-up routine and normal operation regulation and control shutdown and emergency conditions

8 Test data and performance curves where applicable

9 Hard copy and electronic copy of the approved shop drawings (final versions) and final as-built drawings Include final versions of the electronic files required in ldquoSpecial Submittal Requirementsldquo Subsection above on CD-ROM

10 Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit Certified Production Test Reports and Installation information

A Listing and Labeling Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled

1 The Terms Listed and Labeled As defined in the National Electrical Code Article 100

2 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory as defined in OSHA Regulation 19107

B Comply with NFPA 70

C Comply with City of Austin Energy Code

D Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications

E ASME Standard Comply with ASME B315 Refrigeration Piping

F The unit shall be a self-contained factory-assembled unit and CSA-certified to the harmonized US and Canadian product safety standard CSA C222 No 236UL 1995 for Heating and Cooling Equipment and shall be marked with the CSA c-us logo

G The system shall be AHRI Certified using AHRI Standard 1360

H UL Standard Provide products complying with UL 207 Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories Non-electrical or UL 429 Electrically Operated Valves

106 COORDINATION

A Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including ductwork light fixtures electrical power distribution conduits and control wiring conduits

B Coordinate size and location of supports hangers

107 WARRANTY

A The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment furnished will be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of this section of the Contract Specifications If within 24 months after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the equipment or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner

B Special Warranty for the Belts Shaft Blower Bearings Sheave and Pulley If within 60 months [five (5) consecutive years] after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the belts shaft blower bearings sheave and pulley or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner

C Special Warranty for the Compressors If within 120 months [ten (10) consecutive years] after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) the compressors or any parts thereof are found defective because of material workmanship selection of materials or design the manufacturer shall at the manufacturerrsquos expense furnish and install replacement parts of a design workmanship and material approved by the Owner

D Any repairs or replacement parts furnished under the above stated warranties shall carry warranties of the same terms as set forth above from the date of its repair or replacement Cost of Travel lodging labor and parts required as a result of any Warranty Work shall be covered by the warranty (the Manufacturer) All warranty services shall be provided by direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technicians Third party service providers other than direct-factory employed technicians shall not be allowed

A Furnish the services of a qualified experienced direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to provide on-site assistance in the installation of the equipment Include checking alignment of parts wiring connections operation of all parts (blowers belts motors compressors direction expansion coils refrigeration circuits refrigeration system accessories evaporator pan vibration isolation filters filter racks relays starters pressure sensors control panels water detection sensors internal condensate piping external condensate piping etc) Include time to correct and recheck any

discrepancies which are discovered Also include providing the Owner with copies of a report certifying that the equipment was installed properly tested and set in accordance with the Contract Specifications and is in satisfactory operating condition Reports format and quantity shall be per the requirements of Section 01300 and 01730 of the Contract Specifications

B Any problems encountered with the operation of equipment parts components etc installed within the new Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit shall be repairedremedied by the direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician

110 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed are packaged with protective covering for storage and are identified with labels describing contents

1 Fan Belts Four (4) sets for belt-drive fan

2 Filters Three (3) sets of return air filters for unit

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Modular Units

1 Liebert Corp

2 Airflow Co Marduk Holding Corp

3 Engineer Approved Equal

202 MODULAR UNITS

A Description and Assembly Packaged factory assembled prewired and prepiped consisting of cabinet fans filters and controls

1 Assembly Upflow air delivery in draw-through configuration The supply air shall exit from the top of the unit The return air shall enter the unit from the front of the cabinet through factory-installed grilles

B Cabinet and Frame Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity supporting compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings

1 The frame shall be MIG welded formed sheet metal It shall be protected against corrosion using the autophoretic coating process The frame shall be capable of being separated into three parts in the field to accommodate rigging through small spaces

2 Double-Skin Panels The exterior panels shall be internally lined with 20 gauge sheet metal sandwiching the insulation between the panels for easy cleaning

3 Doors and Access Panels Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets hinges and concealed fastening devices

a Insulation Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 1-inch- thick duct liner

4 Main front panel shall have captive frac14 turn fasteners

5 The filter chamber shall be located within the cabinet and filters shall be removable from the front or rear of the unit Filters shall be arranged in a horizontal bank configuration

6 Finish of Exterior Surfaces Baked-on textured vinyl enamel

a Color Manufacturers standard color

C Evaporator Fans

1 The fans shall be plugplenum type single inlet and shall be dynamically balanced

2 The drive package shall be direct drive electronically commutated and variable speed The fans shall be located to draw air over the A-frame coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance

D Fan Motor and Drive Package Assembly

1 The fans shall be the centrifugal type double-width and double-inlet and shall be dynamically balanced as a completed assembly

2 The shaft shall be heavy-duty steel with self-aligning permanently-sealed pillow-block bearings with a minimum L3 life of 200000 hours

3 The fans shall draw air through the coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance

4 The fan motor shall be mounted to an automatic spring tensioning base

5 The motor shall be removable from the front of the cabinet

6 The drive package shall be two-belt variable speed sized for 200 of the fan-motor horsepower

7 An auto-tension system shall provide constant tension on the belts

8 The motor system shall have built-in current and overload protection

9 The motor shall be sized to provide the total required static air lift for the given flow rate External static pressure is listed in ACU schedule located on the PLANS Manufacturer shall assume a 34 dirty filter when sizing fan blower For example if a clean filter yields a 03 IWG static pressure drop and a dirty filter yields a 10 IWG static pressure drop the manufacturer shall budget a 0825 IWG pressure across the filter when sizing the blower motor

10 The fan motor shall be mounted to an automatic spring-tensioning base The motor shall be removable from the front of the cabinet

11 The fan motor shall be Open Drip-Proof Premium efficiency and shall meet NEMA Premium standard

12 The motor shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled for protection in harsh environments

13 The motor sheave and fan pulley shall be double-width fixed pitch Two belts sized for 200 of the fan motor horsepower shall be provided with the drive package An auto-tension system shall provide constant tension on the belts Belts shaft blower bearings sheave and pulley shall be warranted for five years (parts only)

E Compressors Semihermetic with suction-gas-cooled motors vibration isolators thermal overloads oil sight glass manual-reset high-pressure switch pump down low-pressure switch suction-line strainer reversible oil pumps and 1750 rpm

1 Refrigeration Circuits Each unit shall include two (2) independent refrigeration circuits and shall include hot gas mufflers (semi hermetic compressors units only) liquid line filter dryers refrigerant sight glasses with moisture indicator externally equalized expansion valves and liquid line solenoid valves Compressors shall be located outside the air stream and shall be removable and serviceable from the front of the unit

2 The compressor shall be semi-hermetic with a suction gas cooled motor vibration isolators thermal overloads oil sight glass automatic reset high pressure switch with control lockout after three failures pump-down low pressure transducer suction line strainer service valves reversible oil pumps for forced feed lubrication a maximum operating speed of 1750 rpm The system shall include cylinder unloaders on the semi-hermetic compressors The unloaders shall be activated by solenoid valves which are controlled from the microprocessor control In response to the return air temperature the microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained The stages shall be

a One compressor partially loaded

b Two compressors partially loaded

c One compressor partially loaded one compressor fully loaded

d Two compressors fully loaded

3 On a call for dehumidification the microprocessor control shall ensure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control

4 The compressors shall include crankcase heaters powered from the indoor unit electric panel

5 The system shall be designed for use with R-407C refrigerant at a minimum and shall meet the most current EPA clean air act for phase-out of HCFC refrigerants

6 Where manufacturer only provides Scroll compressors manufacturer shall obtain prior written approval of Engineer to provide at least four digital scroll compressors Hot gas bypass shall not be allowed Refrigeration circuits shall

modulate coolingdehumidification with controls that meet or exceed control sequence required in this section

F Evaporator Coil Alternate-row A-Frame or split-face circuits direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins mounted over 316 stainless-steel drain pan

G Internal Condensate Drain Internal condensate drain from internal condensate drain pan to external condensate drain connection shall be as follows NO EXCEPTIONS

1 Internal condensate drain line connection to internal drain pan and connection to external unit condensate line shall ALL be one size larger than required per the IAPMO Mechanical Code Condensate Waste Sizing and in all cases shall not be less than 1-14rdquo diameter

2 Drain line shall have NO internal P-trap

3 Drain line shall be a Schedule 40 equivalent thickness clear plastic tubing

4 Internal drain line shall be pitched down one inch (1) minimum in the direction of flow per one foot (1rsquo) of horizontal run at all points of run Strap drain line with 316 stainless steel metal couplings screwed via 316 stainless steel screws to the unit frame structure

H Air-Cooled Condenser Corrosion-resistant aluminum cabinet copper-tube aluminum-fin coils arranged for 2 circuits multiple direct-drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball bearings and single-phase motors with internal overload protection

1 The air-cooled condenser shall be a factory-assembled unit complete with integral electrical panel designed for outdoor installation The condenser shall be a draw-through design

a Condenser shall consist of microchannel condenser coils propeller fans direct-driven by individual fan motors electrical controls housing and mounting legs The air-cooled condenser shall provide positive refrigerant head pressure control to the indoor cooling unit by adjusting heat rejection capacity The unit shall utilize EC fans and fan operating techniques to reduce fan speeds and reduce sound levels

b Provide condensing unit with fan speed control and ambient control systems The variable speed motor shall operate from 480 Volts (AC) three phase power source 10 to 1050 rpm The control system shall be complete with transducers thermostats and electrical control circuit factory pre-packaged The transducer shall automatically sense the highest head pressure of either operating compressor and control the variable speed fan on the air-cooled condenser to properly maintain the head pressure The remaining fans shall cycle on ambient control by cycling three fan units in two steps for a four fan unit condenser

2 Condenser Coils The condenser coils shall be constructed of aluminum microchannel tubes fins and manifolds Tubes shall be flat and contain multiple parallel-flow microchannels and span between aluminum headers Full-depth louvered aluminum fins shall fill spaces between the tubes Tubes fins and aluminum headers shall be oven-brazed to form a complete refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger coil Copper stub pipes shall be electric resistance-welded to

aluminum coils and joints protected with polyolefin to seal joints from corrosive environmental elements Coil assemblies shall be factory leak tested at a minimum of 300 psig Hot -gas and liquid lines shall be copper and shall be brazed using nitrogen gas flow to the stub pipes with spun-closed ends for customer piping connections Complete coilpiping assembly shall be then filled and sealed with an inert gas holding charge for shipment

a Condenser Coil Coating for Added Corrosion Protection Provide a flexible epoxy coating to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins The coating shall increase coil corrosion protection and shall reduce heat rejection capacity degradation to less than 10 after a severe 2000 hour 5 neutral salt-spray test per ASTM B117 The coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation

3 Condenser Fan MotorBlade Assembly The fan motorblade assembly shall have an external rotor motor fan blades and fanfinger guard Fan blades shall be constructed of cast aluminum or glass-reinforced polymeric material Fan guards shall be heavy gauge close-meshed steel wire coated with a black corrosion-resistant finish Fan terminal blocks shall be in an IP54 enclosure on the top of the fan motor Fan assemblies shall be factory-balanced tested before shipment and mounted securely to the condenser structure

a EC Fan Motors The EC-fan motors shall be electronically commutated for variable-speed operation and shall have ball bearings The EC fans shall provide internal overload protection through built-in electronics Each EC-fan motor shall have a built-in controller and communication module linked via RS485 communication wire to each fan and the Premium Control Board allowing each fan to receive and respond to precise fan speed inputs from the Premium Control Board

4 Condenser Electrical Controls Electrical controls and service-connection terminals shall be provided and factory-wired inside the attached control panel section Only high-voltage supply wiring and low-voltage indoor-unit communicationinterlock wiring are required at condenser installation

a Fan Speed and Controls The EC fanPremium Control System shall include an electronic control board EC-fan motor(s) with internal overload protection refrigerant and ambient temperature thermistors and refrigerant pressure transducers The Premium Control Board shall communicate directly with the indoor units control via field-supplied CANbus communication wires and via field-supplied low-voltage interlock wires The control board shall use sensor and communication inputs to maintain refrigerant pressure by controlling each EC fan on the same refrigerant circuit to the same speed The Premium control board shall be rated to a temperature of ndash30degF to 125degF The premium control shall be factory-set for fan speed control

b Locking Disconnect Switch A locking-type disconnect switch shall be factory-mounted and wired to the electrical panel and be capable of disrupting the flow of power to the unit and controlled via an externally-mounted locking and lockable door handle The locking disconnect shall be lockable in support of lockouttagout safety programs

c Short Circuit Current Rating The electrical panel shall provide at least 65000 A SCCR

5 Condenser Cabinet The condenser cabinet shall be constructed of bright aluminum sheet and divided into individual fan sections by full-width baffles Internal structural support members including coil support frame shall be galvanized steel for strength and corrosion resistance Panel doors shall be provided on two sides of each coilfan section to permit coil cleaning An electrical panel shall be contained inside a factory-mounted NEMA 3R weatherproof electrical enclosure

6 Mounting Legs Aluminum legs shall be provided to mount unit for vertical air discharge with rigging holes for hoisting the unit into position Height shall be 18 inches

I Filters Pleated lofted nonwoven reinforced cotton fabric supported and bonded to welded-wire grid enclosed in cardboard frame

1 Filters shall be deep pleated 4 in filters with an ASHRAE 522 MERV11 rating (60-65 ASHRAE 521)

J Electric-Resistance Heating Coil The electric reheat coils shall be low watt density 304304 stainless steel fin tubular construction protected by thermal safety switches and shall be controlled in three (3) stages The reheat elements shall be removable from the front of the cabinet

1 Provide enclosed-fin electric elements with primary and secondary thermal switches manual-reset overload protection and branch-circuit overcurrent protection

2 The environmental control unit shall include a factory-installed reheat to control temperature during dehumidification

K Electrical Panel NEMA 250 Type 2 enclosure with piano-hinged door grounding lug combination magnetic starters with overload relays circuit breakers and cover interlock and fusible control-circuit transformer

1 Disconnect Switch

a Non-automatic molded-case circuit breaker

b The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high-voltage section of the electrical panel The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit with the door closed and shall prevent access to the high voltage electrical components until switched to the Off position

L Microprocessor-Control System

M The unit controls shall be microprocessor-based with a 9 inch minimum sized color touchscreen display The display and housing shall be viewable while the front panel is open or closed The controls shall be menu-driven The system shall display user menus for active alarms event log graphic data unit viewstatus overview (including the monitoring of room conditions operational status in percentage of each function date and time) total run hours various sensors display setup and service contacts A password shall be required to make system changes Service menus shall include

setpoints standby settings (leadlag) timerssleep mode alarm setup sensor calibration maintenancewellness settings options setup systemnetwork setup auxiliary boards and diagnosticsservice mode

1 Password Protection The unit controls shall contain two unique passwords to protect against unauthorized changes An auto hideshow feature shall allow the user to see applicable information based on the login used

2 Unit BackupRestore The Backup function saves a copy of the settings in a file based on the system name assigned during startup The backup can be used to restore only the unit where it was created and serve as a recovery if a display fails The backup file includes network settings the unit name panel configuration and other details specific to the unit controls display The Restore function copies the backup settings file to a unit controlsdisplay so that it functions exactly as it did before the unwanted change or as it did on the unit controls that was replaced

3 Unit ExportImport The Export function makes a copy of the settings from the unit controls display that may be stored on a local disk or USB drive The settings may be imported to a second unit controls resulting in two systems with identical display properties The unit controls will automatically recognize USB drives and display them in the relevant screens Multiple backup files may be put on the same USB drive as long as each system name is unique The Import function allows previously exported settings files to be loaded to a second unit controls This allows display settings including panel configurations and custom labels to be copied from one display to another

4 Parameter Download The unit controls shall enable the user to download a report that lists parameter names factory default settings and user programmed settings in csv format for remote reference

5 Parameter Search The unit controls shall have search fields for efficient navigation and parameter lookup

6 Parameter Directory The unit controls shall provide a directory that lists all parameters in the control The list shall provide Line ID numbers parameter labels and current parameter values

7 Setup Wizards The unit controls shall contain step-by-step tutorials or wizards to provide easy setup of the control

8 Context-Sensitive Help The unit controls shall have an on-board help database The database shall provide context-sensitive help to assist with setup and navigation of the menus

9 Display Setup The user shall be able to configure the display information based on the specific userrsquos preference Language units of measure screen contrast home screen layout back-light timer and the hideshow of certain readouts shall be configurable through the display

10 Additional Readouts The display shall enable the user to configure custom widgets on the main screen Widget options will include items such as fan speed call for cooling call for free-cooling maintenance status call for hot water reheat call for electric reheat call for dehumidification call for humidification airflow static pressure fluid flow rate and cooling capacity

11 Status LEDrsquos The unit controls shall show the unitrsquos operating status using an integral LED The LED shall indicate if the unit has an active alarm if the unit has an active alarm that has been acknowledged or if the unit is On Off or in standby status

12 Event Log The unit controls shall automatically store the last 400 unit-only events (messages warnings and alarms)

13 Service Contact Information The unit controls shall be able to store the local service or sales contact information

14 Upgradeable unit controls upgrades shall be performed through a USB connection

15 TimersSleep Mode ndash The menus shall allow various customer settings for turning the unit On or Off

16 Menu Layout The menus shall be divided into two main menus User and Service The User screen shall contain the menus to access parameters required for basic unit control and setup The Service screen shall be designed for service personnel and shall provide access to advanced control setup features and diagnostic information

17 Sensor Calibration The menus shall allow unit sensors to be calibrated with external sensors

18 MaintenanceWellness Settings The menus shall allow reporting of potential component problems before they occur

19 Options Setup The menus shall provide operation settings for the installed components

20 Auxiliary Boards The menus shall allow setup of optional expansion boards

21 Various Sensors The menus shall allow setup and display of optional custom sensors The control shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for field-supplied sensors The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20mA signal The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5VDC or 0 to 10VDC The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front display The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front display

22 DiagnosticsService Mode The unit controls shall be provided with self-diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting The microcontroller board shall be diagnosed and reported as passnot pass Control inputs shall be indicated as On or Off at the front display Control outputs shall be able to be turned On or Off from the front display without using jumpers or a service terminal Each control output shall be indicated by an LED on a circuit board

N Continuously monitors operation of process cooling system continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity sounds alarm on system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem

1 All unit alarms shall be annunciated through both audio and visual cues clearly displayed on the screen automatically recorded in the event log and communicated to the customers Building Management SystemBuilding Automation System The unit controls shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions

a High Temperature

b Low Temperature

c High Humidity

d Low Humidity

e EC Fan Fault

f Change Filters

g Loss of Air Flow

h Loss of Power

i Compressor Overload (Optional)

j Humidifier Problem

k High Head Pressure

l Low Suction Pressure

m Custom Alarms

n Custom alarm inputs shall be provided to indicate facility-specific events Custom alarms can be identified with programmable labels Frequently used alarm inputs include 1) Leak Under Floor

2) Smoke Detected

3) Standby Unit On

o Each alarm (unit and custom) shall be separately enabled or disabled selected to activate the common alarm and programmed for a time delay of 0 to 255 seconds

2 The unit controls shall be factory-set to allow precise monitoring and control of the condition of the air entering and leaving the unit This control shall include predictive methods to control air flow and cooling capacity based control sensors installed Proportional and Tunable PID shall also be user-selectable options

a Controlling Sensor Options 1) The unit controls shall be flexible in the sense that it shall allow

for controlling the capacity and fan from multiple different sensor selections The sensor selections shall be

b Cooling Capacity 1) Supply

2) Remote

3) Return

c Fan Speed 1) Supply

2) Remote

3) Return

4) Static Pressure

d Temperature Compensation 1) The unit controls shall be able to adjust the capacity output

based on supply and return temperature conditions to meet SLA guidelines while operating to highest efficiency

e Humidity Control 1) Dew point and relative humidity control methods shall be

available (based on user preference) for humidity control within the conditioned space

3 Multi-Unit Coordination The control system shall allow only one (1) unit to operate at the same time Thus if the primary unit that is operating is down or otherwise not operating the unit controls shall shut down the primary unit and energize the second unit

a Stanby Lead-Lag The unit controls shall allow scheduled rotation to keep equal run time on units and provide automated emergency rotation of operating and standby units

4 Wire Supply Sensors Each control unit shall have one factory-supplied and connected supply air sensor that may be used as a controlling sensor or reference When multiple sensors are applied for control purposes the user shall be able to control based on a maximum or average temperature reading

5 Compressor Short Cycle Control To help maximize the life of the compressor(s) there shall be start-to-next start delay for each single compressor The control shall monitor the number of compressor starts in an hour If the compressor starts more than 10 times in 60 minutes the local display and remote monitoring shall notify the user through a Compressor 1 or 2 Short Cycle event

6 System Auto Restart The unit controls shall restart the system after a power failure Time delay shall be programmable An capacitive buffer may be provided for continuous control operation through a power failure

a On initial startup or restart after power failure each operational load shall be sequenced with a minimum delay of one second to minimize total inrush current

7 Low Pressure Monitoring The unit shall have low-pressure transducers for monitoring individual compressor suction pressure If the pressure falls due to loss of charge or other mechanical cause the corresponding circuit shall shut down to prevent equipment damage The user shall be notified of the low-pressure condition through the local display and remote monitoring

8 Winter Start Time Delay An adjustable software timer shall be provided to assist with compressor starting during cold weather When the compressor starts the low-pressure input shall be ignored for the period set in the user-adjustable timer Once the time period has elapsed after the compressor start the low-pressure input should remain in the normal state If the low-pressure input does not remain in the normal state when the time delay has elapsed the circuit shall lock out on low pressure The low-pressure alarm shall be announced on the local display and communicated to remote monitoring systems

9 Freeze Protection Provide a freeze to monitor the pressure of each circuit using a transducer The control shall interact with the fan and compressor to prevent the unit coil from freezing if circuit suction pressure drops Applying fan speed to direct expansion systems requires limitations to avoid freezing condensate on the coil when the unit operates below 100 fan speed The unit controls shall predict freeze conditions and correct this condition automatically by adjusting fan speed and compressor capacity If a freeze condition is detected the user shall be notified through the local display and remote monitoring systems

10 Refrigerant Pressure Transducer Failure The control shall monitor the high-side and low-side refrigerant pressure transducers If the control senses the transducer has failed has been disconnected has shorted or the reading has gone out of range the user shall be notified through an event on the local display and remote monitoring The corresponding circuit that the failure has occurred on shall be disabled to prevent unit damage

11 Oil Return Protection The unit controls shall monitor compressor operation and staging to ensure that liquid and hot gas velocity are maintained for proper oil return to the compressor

12 Compressor Sequencing A user-selectable compressor sequencing parameter shall be provided and shall be accessible through the local display This sequencing parameter shall present the user with three choices

a Always use Compressor 1 as the lead compressor

b Always use Compressor 2 as the lead compressor

c Auto The unit shall automatically stage compressors to keep each unitrsquos run time within 8 hours of the otherrsquos run time The Auto setting shall attempt to maintain equal run times between compressors However the control will not turn Off a compressor to equalize run time when it is needed to control the space 1) First priority If the safety timings are acceptable for only one

compressor then it is the next to be startedstopped

2) Second priority If both compressors are Off The compressor with fewer working hours is the next to start

3) Third priority If both compressors are in operation the compressor that has been operating longer since the last start is the next to be stopped

13 Compressor High- and Low-Temperature Limit Protection The control shall monitor the return air to ensure that the compressor(s) are operated within the manufacturerrsquos defined window of operation If the return air temperature deviates from the manufacturerrsquos window of operation the unit controls shall automatically adjust to prevent damage to the cooling unit or reduction in its reliability

14 Compressor Run Time Monitoring The user shall have the ability to monitor compressor operating temperature and pressure from the local display to be used as a diagnostic tool The unit controls shall log the following compressor statistics

a Number of compressor starts

b Run hours

c Average run time

d Starts per day

e Starts per day worst

f Number of high-pressure alarms

g Operating phase in which the high-pressure alarm occurred

h Number of low-pressure alarms

i Operating phase in which the low-pressure alarm occurred

j Number of compressor overloads

k Number of high-temperature alarms (scroll compressors)

15 Manual Compressor Disablement The user shall have the ability to disable compressor operation using a set of either normally open or normally closed dry contacts tied directly to the control or through remote monitoring An additional enabledisable feature shall be provided to allow the user to permanently disable an individual compressor circuit for maintenance using the local display

16 Manual Compressor Operation The user shall be able to operate each compressor(s) manually from the local display The user shall be able to energize refrigeration components including liquid line solenoid valves compressor contactors electronic expansion valves and adjust capacity for troubleshooting or repair The control shall monitor the compressor during manual operation and shall shut the compressor down if needed to prevent electrical or mechanical damage

17 Flooded Start Protection The unit controls shall isolate each compressor through a dedicated circuit liquid line solenoid valve andor electronic expansion valve These devices combined with a spring-closed discharge check valve and compressor crankcase heater (air-cooled models) shall help ensure refrigerant does not migratecarry oil out of the compressor case during the off cycle

18 Compressor Dehumidification The unit controls shall permit the user to specify which compressor is used for dehumidification The choices shall be 1st compressor 2nd compressor 1 or 2 or BOTH

19 The control system shall provide the following to prevent excessive compressor wear

a The control system shall include a program to prevent compressor short cycling

b The control system shall automatically change the leadlag sequence of compressors after each start to lengthen compressor-on cycles and even compressor wear

c The system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable time delay after a power failure The restart time delay shall be programmed to 15 seconds

20 The unit shall contain a data input and output interface as follows

a The unit shall contain a front monitor LCD backlit display panel The display panel shall allow input and output of information via a menu-driven graphical user interface

b The unit shall display at minimum the following Control Power On System On Dehumidification Taking Place Compressor No 1 Operating Compressor No 2 Operating and Heat Operating

c Each common malfunction alarm shall be separately enabled and disabled By default all alarms listed as Common Malfunction Alarms above shall be enabled Any Low-Humidity alarms shall be disabled

d The control system shall be configured to accept a password to change set-points By default the system shall be programmed to not require a password to change set-points

21 Provide individual factory installed alarm contacts (dry contacts) each rated at 1 Amp 120 Volts AC for remote signaling each of the following system alarms

a Smoke Detection

b Common Malfunction Alarm

c Water Detection by WDT-1 (cable water detection module)

d Filter Clog

O Smoke Detector

1 When the smoke detector signals the presence of smoke the control system within the unit shall automatically shut-down the unit send a Smoke Detection alarm and not resume operation until the unit is manually restarted via the unit displaycontrol panel

2 The smoke sensor shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return-air compartment

3 The smoke sensor shall include a supervision contact closure

P Low-Voltage Terminal Package Factory-installed and factory-wired terminals shall be provided

1 Remote Shutdown Terminals Two additional pairs of terminals provide the customer with additional locations to remotely shut down the unit by field-installed devices or controls

2 Extra Common Alarm Contacts Two additional pairs of terminals provide the customer with normally open contacts for remote indication of unit alarms

3 Main Fan Auxiliary Switch One set of normally open contacts wired to the EC fan motor contactor will close when EC fan operation is required This set of dry contacts could also be used to initiate air economizer operation Air economizer and associated devices by others

4 Water Detection Shutdown One pair of dry contacts for the Water Detection sensor signal will provide unit shut down

Q Static Pressure Transducers The unit shall have four (4) factory-installed and factory-programmed static pressure transducers The transducers shall be used for control of fan speed or reference of the supply plenum pressure

1 Sharing sensor data across multiple units in the unit network shall allow for greater flexibility visibility and control

2 The control unit shall offer the user selections to control fan from either the average or lowest pressure reading collected in the network

R Air Flow Monitoring The unit controls shall monitor evaporator fan airflow for monitoring purpose

S A factory-installed communication card shall be provided for monitoring andor control The communication card shall be capable of connecting to Building Management SystemBuilding Automation System using the following protocols

1 BACnet IP BACnet over Internet Protocol

2 BACnet MSTP BACnet Master-SlaveToken-Passing (MSTP) communications protocol over a RS-485 serial network (also known as BACnet MSTP RS-485)

3 Modbus RTU Modbus Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) communication protocol over a RS-485 serial network (also known as Modbus RTU RS-485)

4 Modbus TCP Modbus Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol (also known as Modbus TCPIP)

5 SNMP

6 YDN23 - YD-T-1363 specification protocol (also known as YDT 1363)

7 The communications card shall be capable of connecting to two of these protocols at once

T Water Detection Transmitters Provide means for water detection to allow for 1) water detection in the overflow pan and 2) the means to detect and shutoff the ACU when the overflow pan is near full capacity (water is at 12rdquo below rim of pan)

1 Detection of Overflow Provide Liebert Liqui-Tect 460 leak detection module and fifteen (15) feet of LT500Y leak detection cable with manufacturer fasteners or Engineer approved equal

2 Detection of Pan Near Full Provide Liebert Liqui-Tect 410 or Engineer approved equal leak detection module Provide required interlocks and program to shutdown unit upon detection of pan near full Program unit to indicate cause for shutdown to due overflow pan near full

3 The 24 Volts low voltage power supply unit required for the water detection transmitters shall be integral to and furnished with the Air Conditioning Unit

U Super-Cap for Maintaining Alarming Upon Loss of Power Provide a factory furnished and installed super-cap assemblycomponents in the unit to maintain sending alarms (dry contact alarms etc) for at least one (1) hour after the unit experiences a loss of power

V Power Monitoring The unit shall be equipped with factory-programmedinstalled power meters to monitor power characteristics for either individual components or the total

unit These meters shall allow the user to monitor meter connection status input undervoltage input RMS voltage leg-to-leg and leg-to-ground input current for each phase energy consumption in kilowatt hours and instantaneous power in watts In multi-unit applications a phase loss protection routine shall place a unit into standby mode in the event

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Furnish the services of a direct-factory trained and direct-factory employed technician to assist and supervise in the installation of the equipment connections and adjustments start-up and testing of the Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit components contained therein Also refer to the requirements of ldquoSpecial Manufacturerrsquos Servicesldquo Subsection in this section of the Contract Specifications Include time to correct any defects or malfunctions

B Start the system in accordance with manufacturers start-up instructions Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible with heat-dissipation requirements

C Engage manufacturers field service technicians to provide warranty start-up supervision and assist in programming of unit controls and all ancillary devicespanels supplied by the unit manufacturer

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

A Install units according to manufacturers written instructions

1 Install units in accordance with manufacturerrsquos installation instructions

2 Install units plumb and level firmly anchored in locations indicated and maintain manufacturerrsquos recommended clearances

D Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations

E Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope Support channels below equipment for shall be at proper height for pipe slope and coordination with overflow pan

F Refer to the PLANS for installation of unit upon overflow drain pan Provide support frame as shown on the PLANS composed of double channel 316 SS channels as manufactured by ldquoUnistrutrdquo or approved equal Provide all angle brackets and end caps for a finished assembly

G Provide 6rdquo x 6rdquo neoprene isolation pads between support channel and bottom of unit Reference the PLANS for number and arrangement of pads

H Refer to the PLANS for installation of water detection transmitters (WDT-1 and WDT-2) and associated cablessupports Fasten WDT with 316 SS double channel supports Refer to the PLANS for additional requirements

I Install air-cooled condenser on neoprene vibration isolation pads Provide a 6rdquo x 6rdquo neoprene isolation pad below each support leg of unit Refer to the PLANS for additional requirements Bolt Condensing Unit through isolation pads onto concrete slab Use expansion anchors in concrete slab for fastening

A Cut fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location alignment and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment

B Mechanical equipment piping tubing and ductwork support channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material All support channels shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo series P-1000ST and P-1001ST or approved equal All fastening hardware fittings supports base posts clamps channel nuts framing system etc shall be fabricated with 316 stainless steel as manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal Epoxy inserts and expansion anchors shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel and shall be installed per the manufacturerrsquos recommendations Mechanical equipmentductworkpipetubing hangers and threaded rods shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material All hangers and threaded rods shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal

C Field Welding Comply with AWS D11 Structural Welding Code--Steel

306 CONNECTIONS

A PLANS indicate the general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties The following are specific connection requirements

1 Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted

B Primary and Overflow Condensate Drain Connections

1 Refer to the PLANS for general routing Provide adequate connections for condensate drain Slope drain lines at 14 down per one foot of horizontal run in the direction of flow

2 Install piping to allow service and maintenance

3 Provide support channels and straps for piping

C Electrical Connections

1 Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not factory-mounted Furnish copy of manufacturerrsquos electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor

2 Provide electrical power conduits Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

3 Provide electrical power and grounding wiring and connections thereof to Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

4 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values Where manufacturers torque values are not indicated use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B

D Instrumentation and Control Connections

1 Provide control wiring between multiple Air Conditioning Units to allow the multiple units to communicate to one another and all required hardware cables raceways and unit control featuresconfiguration as required to ensure only one unit operates at one time

a Provide a crossover type Category 6 minimum Ethernet cable and other equipment as may be required between the units to allow full communication between the units to ensure the required lead-lag sequence team working sequences and to ensure only one unit is running at one time Coordinate the required Ethernet cable type with manufacturer and provide Category 6 as a minimum

b Reference the PLANS and the Division 16 Contract Specifications for additional requirements

2 Provide control wiring and connections thereof between the Air Conditioning Unit and the Condensing Unit Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

a Tighten condensing unit connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values Where manufacturers torque values are not indicated use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B

3 Provide and terminate all low voltage (24 Volt) cables between water detection modules ldquoWDT-1rdquo and Air Conditioning Unit and between ldquoWDT-2rdquo and Air Conditioning Unit Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS The 24 Volts low voltage power supply unit shall be integral to and furnished with the Air Conditioning Unit

a Provide conduitsraceways between water detection modules ldquoWDT-1rdquo and Air Conditioning Unit and between ldquoWDT-2rdquo and Air Conditioning Unit Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

4 Provide control wiring and connections thereof between Air Conditioning unit and Programmable Logic Controller as scheduled on the electrical PLANS to monitor Air Conditioning Unit dry contact alarms Reference Division 16 of Contract Specifications and electrical PLANS

5 All control and power cables between the units between each Air Condition Unit and the associated Condensing Unit between each Air Condition Unit and remote field installed sensors (water detection sensors etc) and between each Air Condition Unit and the Plant Control System Control Panels Programmable Logic Controllers etc including but not limited to low voltage control cables power cables and Category 6 Ethernet cables shall be routed in conduitraceway systems

a Use andor provide necessary knockouts in the unit casings to ensure all cables are routed in conduitraceways

b Install all conduits raceways and their supports in accordance with Division 16 requirements

c Coordinate the installation of cables and conduitsraceways with Division 16

d Reference the PLANS and the Division 16 Contract Specifications for additional requirements

E Fire Alarm System Connections

308 ADJUSTING

A Set initial temperature and humidity set points as follows

1 Temperature

a Temperature setpoint shall be 73 F

b Temperature sensitivity shall be +- 5 F

2 Humidity

a Humidity setpoint shall be 50 RH

b Humidity sensitivity shall be + 5 RH

c The unit shall not provide humidification thus no controls are required to increase humidity when room humidity is below 50 RH Low humidity alarms shall not be activated

3 Lead-Lag Sequence

a The unit tagged ldquo001rdquo shall by default be programmed as the initial lead unit if such a configuration setting is required Thereafter the unit controls shall allow for lead-lag sequencing as specified

310 CLEANING

After completing system installation including outlet fittings and devices inspect exposed finish Remove burrs dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips scratches and abrasions

311 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

3 Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly

8 Control wires are properly connected

D After starting and performance test change filters

312 TRAINING

A Provide training session for up to eight (8) ownerrsquos representatives for two (2) full normal workdays at the job-site location andor at a location determined by the owner

C As a minimum the training session shall also include

1 Operation and maintenance procedure for the equipment and all components contained within the Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit

3 Use of graphical interface associated with the various microprocessor based control system for the Air Conditioning Unit and Condensing Unit

4 Factory contact persons phone numbers persons names ordering procedures and procedures to follow to obtain meaningful results from the factory

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15815 ndash Page 1 of 6 Metal Ducts

SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes rectangular metal ducts for heating ventilating and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg

1 Division 15 Section Duct Accessories for dampers duct-mounted access doors and panels and turning vanes

2 Division 15 Section Diffusers Registers and Grilles

3 Division 15 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing for air balancing and final adjusting of manual-volume dampers

102 DEFINITIONS

Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value) As defined in ASTM C 168 In this Section these values are the result of the formula Btu x inh x sq ft x deg F at the temperature differences specified Values are expressed as Btu

Duct system design as indicated has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure

104 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

1 For duct liner and sealing materials

2 Duct liner mechanical fasteners

C Field Test Reports Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements

D Record Drawings Indicate actual routing fitting details reinforcement support and installed accessories and devices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A Galvanized Sheet Steel Comply with ASTM A 653A 653M G90 Galvanized Coating Designation Sheet steel shall not be painted and shall not require a paint grip finish

B Stainless-Steel Sheets Comply with ASTM A 480A 480M Type 316 cold rolled annealed sheet Exposed surface finish shall be No 2B

C Reinforcement Shapes and Plates

1 Galvanized-Steel for galvanized duct

2 Stainless steel for stainless steel duct

D Tie Rods Stainless-steel 14-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less 38-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches

202 DUCT LINER

A General Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMAs Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard

B Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide duct liner products by one of the following or other Engineer approved equal

1 Mineral-Fiber Insulation

a CertainTeed Manson

b Knauf FiberGlass GmbH

c Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp

d Schuller International Inc

C Materials ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers and with bacteria and fungi protection

1 Owens-Corning Quiet-R brand Type 200 duct liner or Engineer approved equal from listed manufacturers

2 Thickness

a General 1 inch

b Ductwork in Operations Building 2 inch

3 Thermal Conductivity (k-Value) 025 at 75 deg F mean temperature

4 Fire-Hazard Classification Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411

5 Liner Adhesive Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916

6 Mechanical Fasteners Galvanized Steel suitable for mechanical attachment or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct

a Tensile Strength Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall

b Fastener Pin Length As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 18 inch into airstream

203 SEALANT MATERIALS

A Joint and Seam Sealants General

1 Joint and Seam Sealant One-part nonsag solvent-release-curing polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids

2 Flanged Joint Mastics One-part acid-curing silicone elastomeric joint sealants complying with ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use O

204 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Trapeze Riser and Floor Supports

1 Duct support shall be double channel trapeze supports with proper threaded rods floor posts and clamp accessories

2 Duct support channels threaded rods floor posts and accessories shall be constructed of stainless-steel

B Channels shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material All support channels shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo series P-1000ST and P-1001ST or approved equal

C All fastening hardware fittings supports threaded rods base posts clamps channel nuts framing system etc shall be fabricated with 316 stainless steel as manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal

D Epoxy inserts and expansion anchors shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel and shall be installed per the manufacturerrsquos recommendations Hangers and threaded rods shall be fabricated with 316-Stainless Steel material

E All hangers and threaded rods shall be manufactured by ldquoUnistrut Corporationrdquo or approved equal

205 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A General Fabricate ducts elbows transitions offsets branch connections and other construction with galvanized steel sheets according to SMACNAs HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible Comply with requirements for metal thickness reinforcing types and intervals tie-rod applications and joint types and intervals

1 Lengths Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification

2 Materials Free from visual imperfections such as pitting seam marks roller marks stains and discolorations

B Static-Pressure Classifications Unless otherwise indicated construct ducts to the following

1 Supply Ducts 2-inch wg

2 Fresh Air Ducts 2-inch wg negative pressure

206 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited

B Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing

C Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive

D Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping

E Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints except at corners of ducts unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary

F Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally

G Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or Z profile or are integrally formed from duct wall Fabricate edge facings at the following locations

1 Fan discharge

2 Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct

H Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers turning vane assemblies and other devices Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional when used secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts screws rivets or welds

I Bolts screws and such fastening accessories when used shall be stainless-steel

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 DUCT INSTALLATION GENERAL

A Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts fittings and accessories

B Duct material

1 All outsidefresh air ductwork including ductwork providing outside air to srcubbers shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel

2 All ductwork downstream of scrubber units including the discharge of scrubber units shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel

3 All other ductwork shall be galvanized steel

C Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated

D Ductwork at all areas shall not provide more than 35 NC noise level Testing and Balance contractor shall review ductwork and ensure ductwork shall emit low levels of noise and shall not emit more than 35 NC of noise at any point in ductwork

E Coordinate layout with lighting layouts electrical power distribution conduits and similar finished work

F Bolts screws and such fastening accessories when used shall be stainless-steel

302 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

General Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNAs HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible

303 DUCT LINER

A All ACU supply air ductwork AHU supply and return ductwork and Scrubber system fresh air ductwork shall be provided with internal duct liner product as specified within this section

B Keep insulation materials dry during installation

304 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A Install rigid rectangular duct with channel support systems in accordance to requirements in this Section and SMACNAs HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible

B Requirements as stated in SMACNA standard HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible shall supersede proposed support locations as shown in drawing details Submit to Engineer conflicts if any between proposed duct supports and SMACNA guidelines prior to installation of support items

C Fully support vertical members of ducts near unit installations such that no stress is transferred to any vibration isolation clothmembranes Drawings indicate schematic representations of vertical support members Provide channel angle brackets mounted to wall to support vertical duct members

D Coordinate duct installation and duct support channels and threaded rods with other trades Refer to Division 15 and 16 drawings for allowable height of ACU and AHU ductwork

E Ductwork shall have dedicated support systems Channels and threaded rods supporting ductwork shall only support ductwork

F Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection

G Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load

305 CONNECTIONS

A Connect selected equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section Duct Accessories

B For branch outlet and inlet and terminal unit connections comply with SMACNAs HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible

306 ADJUSTING

Refer to Division 15 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing for detailed procedures

307 CLEANING

After completing system installation including outlet fittings and devices inspect the system Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15820 ndash Page 1 of 6 Duct Accessories

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

1 Volume dampers

2 Turning vanes

3 Duct-mounted access doors and panels

4 Flexible connectors

5 Duct accessory hardware

6 Backdraft dampers

7 Electrical actuators for dampers

1 Division 15 Section Metal Ducts

102 SUBMITTALS

1 Manual-volume dampers

3 Air Extractors

C Shop Drawings Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions weights loadings required clearances method of field assembly components location and size of each field connection Detail the following

1 Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations

D Product Certificates Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss self-noise power levels and airflow performance data static-pressure loss dimensions and weights

E Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved documents and shop drawings

Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

A NFPA Compliance Comply with the following NFPA standards

1 NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

2 NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Refer to Division 15 Section Metal Ducts

202 VOLUME DAMPERS

A General Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories Stiffen damper blades for stability Include locking device to hold dampers in a fixed position without vibration Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class

B Provide the following High-Performance Volume Dampers for all Manual and Automatic Systems shown in drawings Multiple- or single-blade opposed-blade design low-leakage rating with linkage outside airstream and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications

1 Aluminum Frames Hat-shaped 0125-inch- thick extruded-aluminum channels frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts

2 Extruded-Aluminum Blades Minimum of 0081-inch- thick 6063T extruded aluminum airfoil shaped

3 Blade Seals Dual-durometer vinyl or extruded silicone rubber on blade edges metallic compression on jambs

4 Blade Axles Nonferrous

5 Tie Bars and Brackets Aluminum

C Provide the following hardware for manual operated dampers Zinc-plated die-cast core with dial and handle made of 332-inch- thick zinc-plated steel and a 34-inch hexagon locking nut Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting where required

203 TURNING VANES

A Fabricate to comply with SMACNAs HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible

B Vanes shall be of Aluminum construction

204 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A General Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class

B Frame Aluminum sheet with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets

C Door Double-wall aluminum construction with insulation fill and thickness and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class Include 1-by-1-inch aluminum or stainless-steel butt or piano hinge and cam latches Piano hinges shall extend full length of door

D Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber

E Insulation 1-inch- thick fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board

A General Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics coatings and adhesives complying with UL 181 Class 1

B Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 5-34 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-34-inch- wide 0032-inch aluminum sheets

206 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A Instrument Test Holes Cast aluminum including screw cap and gasket Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and length to suit duct insulation thickness

B Splitter Damper Accessories Zinc-plated damper blade bracket 14-inch zinc-plated operating rod and a duct-mounted ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw

C Adhesives High strength quick setting neoprene based waterproof and resistant to gasoline and grease

207 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following

1 American Warming and Ventilating a Mestek Architectural Group company

2 Greenheck Fan Corporation

3 Nailor Industries Inc

4 Ruskin Company

B Description Gravity balanced

C Maximum Air Velocity 3000 fpm

D Maximum System Pressure 3-inch wg

E Frame Hat-shaped 0063-inch-thick extruded aluminum with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange

F Blades Multiple single-piece blades end pivoted maximum 6-inch width 0050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges

G Blade Action Parallel

H Blade Seals Neoprene mechanically locked

I Blade Axles

1 Material Aluminum

2 Diameter 020 inch minimum

J Tie Bars and Brackets Aluminum

K Return Spring Adjustable tension

L Bearings Stainless Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings

M Accessories

1 Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure

2 Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations

3 90-degree stops

208 ELECTRICAL ACTUATORS FOR DAMPERS

A General Electrical actuator suited for damper operation full 90-degree range of motion modulating control

1 Manufacturer and Model No Belimo brand model no EFX120-SR-S N4 motorized modulating actuator or Engineer approved equal

2 Listing UL

3 Enclosure NEMA 4

4 Power 120 VAC

5 Command Signal Input 4-20 ma via Belimo ZG-R01 resistor

a Furnish install and wire the Belimo ZG-R01 resistor inside the actuator housing to allow for a 4-20 ma input setpoint signal

6 Torque Rating 270 in-lb min

7 Feedback Position 2-10 VDC feedback position signal

8 Operation Return fail safe spring

9 Auxiliary Contacts Two (2) auxiliary contacts (for open and closed feedback)

10 Manual Operation Manual override

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

A Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNAs HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible for metal ducts

B Install actuator and proper linkage to damper as per manufacturers recommendations

C Install volume dampers in lined duct avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner

D Install fresh air louver for Scrubber fresh air ductwork per louver manufacturerrsquos recommendations Provide non-shrink grout and fire resistant sealant as required to provide a water tight seal between louver and wall Refer to Division 15 ldquoGeneral HVAC Systems Materials and Methodsrdquo Connect and seal louver to fresh air ductwork and provide airtight seal Refer to Division 15 ldquoMetal Ductsrdquo

E Install air-measuring station as per manufacturerrsquos recommendations and as located in drawings

F Provide test holes as shown in drawings Close each test hole with stainless steel of aluminum cap fitting suitable for duct pressure rating

G Install duct access panels in Scrubber fresh air and supply ductwork and ACU supply ductwork as shown in drawings

H Electric actuators for dampers

1 Install actuator to damper and provide all required factory linkages and support accessories for a fully functional system Furnish all powercontrol cable connections per manufacturer written instructions

2 Install and configure the actuator such that the actuator spring return positions the damper to the fully open position upon loss of power to the actuator

3 Configure the damper actuator such that a 4 ma input signal equates to the fully open damper position and a 20 ma input signal equates to the fully closed damper position

4 Upon loss of the setpoint position signal to the actuator the damper shall fail to the fully open damper position

302 ADJUSTING

A Adjust duct accessories for proper settings

B Adjust flow switch pressure setting for proper detection of unit air flow

C Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15855 ndash Page 1 of 3 Diffusers Registers and Grilles

SECTION 15855

DIFFUSERS REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A This Section includes duct-mounted registers

1 Division 15 Section Duct Accessories for volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers registers and grilles

2 Division 15 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing for balancing diffusers registers and grilles

102 DEFINITIONS

A Grille A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage which can be located in a sidewall ceiling or floor

B Register A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening

103 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data For each model indicated include the following

1 Data Sheet For each type of air outlet and inlet and accessory furnished indicate construction finish and mounting details

2 Performance Data Include throw and drop static-pressure drop and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet

3 Schedule of registers indicating drawing designation quantity model number size and accessories furnished

4 Assembly Drawing For each type of air outlet and inlet indicate materials and methods of assembly of components

Product Options Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of registers and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated Other manufacturers products with equal performance characteristics shall be considered for approval

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Registers are as scheduled on Drawings or approved equal by following manufacturers

1 Air Systems Components Krueger Div

2 Anemostat Products Dynamics Corp of America

3 Carnes Co Inc

4 Hart amp Cooley Inc Hart amp Cooley Div

5 Hart amp Cooley Inc Tuttle amp Bailey Div

7 Titus

202 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Testing Test performance according to ASHRAE 70 Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

Examine areas where registers are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION

A Install registers level and plumb according to manufacturers written instructions Detail Drawings and referenced standards

B Install registers with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers and air extractors

303 ADJUSTING

After installation adjust registers to air patterns indicated on drawings before starting air balancing

304 CLEANING

After installation of registers inspect exposed finish Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs dirt and smudges Replace registers that have damaged finishes

END OF SECTION

Non-Standard 10072019 SAR WWTP Substation 1 15990 ndash Page 1 of 15 Testing Adjusting and Balancing

SECTION 15990

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Contractor shall provide a certified Testing Adjusting and Balancing Agent as specified within this Section to perform the required services as stated in this Section and Contract Documents

B Contractor shall provide additional re-testing services as noted in Part 3 of this section

C This Section includes testing adjusting and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives including the following

1 Balancing airflow within distribution systems including submains branches and terminals to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances

2 Adjusting total ACU and Scrubber systems to provide indicated quantities

3 Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly

4 Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section

102 DEFINITIONS

A Adjust To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper

B Balance To proportion flows within the distribution system including submains branches and terminals according to design quantities

C Draft A current of air when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity low ambient temperature or direction of airflow whereby more heat is withdrawn from a persons skin than is normally dissipated

D Procedure An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results

E Report Forms Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order

F System Effect A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system

G System Effect Factors Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested

H Terminal A point where the controlled medium such as fluid or energy enters or leaves the distribution system

I Test A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment

J Testing Adjusting and Balancing Agent The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing adjusting and balancing procedures

K AABC Associated Air Balance Council

L AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

M NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

N SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

103 SUBMITTALS

B Quality-Assurance Submittals Within 60 days from the Contractors Notice to Proceed submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing adjusting and balancing Agent and this Projects testing adjusting and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the Quality Assurance Article below

C Contract Documents Examination Report Within 90 days from the Contractors Notice to Proceed and prior to development of ductwork or purchase of mechanical equipment and accessories submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section

D Strategies and Procedures Plan Within 120 days from the Contractors Notice to Proceed submit 2 copies of the testing adjusting and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 Preparation Article below Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project

E Certified Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Submit 2 copies of reports prepared as specified in this Section on approved forms certified by the testing adjusting and balancing Agent

F Warranty Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the Warranty Article below

G Operation and Maintenance Data Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals as per contract documents Include certified and approved reports Submit operation and maintenance manuals per the requirements of Section 01730 of the Contract Specifications

A Agent Qualifications Engage a testing adjusting and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB

B Testing Adjusting and Balancing Conference Meet with the Engineerrsquos representatives on approval of the testing adjusting and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details Provide 10 working days advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location

1 Agenda Items Include at least the following

a Submittal distribution requirements

b Contract Documents examination report

c Testing adjusting and balancing plan

d Work schedule and Project site access requirements

e Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors

f Coordination of documentation and communication flow

C Certification of Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Certify the testing adjusting and balancing field data reports This certification includes the following

1 Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing adjusting and balancing reports

2 Certify that the testing adjusting and balancing team complied with the approved testing adjusting and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification

D Testing Adjusting and Balancing Reports Use standard forms from AABCs National Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing or standard forms from NEBBs Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

E Instrumentation Type Quantity and Accuracy As described in AABC national standards or as described in NEBBs Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems Section II Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification

F Instrumentation Calibration Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer

Partial Owner Occupancy The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion Cooperate with the Owner during testing adjusting and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owners operations

106 COORDINATION

A Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment HVAC controls installers and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing adjusting and balancing activities

B Notice Provide 7 days advance notice for each test Include scheduled test dates and times

C Perform testing adjusting and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed

107 WARRANTY

A General Warranty The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents

B Provide following National Project Performance Guarantee or Special Guarantee

1 National Project Performance Guarantee Provide a guarantee on AABCS National Standards forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing adjusting and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents Guarantee includes the following provisions

a The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents

b Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits

2 Special Guarantee Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing adjusting and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents Guarantee includes the following provisions

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

A Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper testing adjusting and balancing of systems and equipment

1 Verify that balancing devices such as manual volume dampers splitters vanes and other such balancing items are required by the Contract Documents Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation

2 Ductwork static pressures listed in drawing schedules and fans and motors selected for equipment shall achieve the flow rates through ductwork and ductwork accessories as indicated in drawings This written assurance is based on ductwork and equipment as indicated in drawings and contract documents

3 Ductwork at all areas shall not provide more than 35 NC noise level Testing and Balance contractor shall review ductwork and ensure ductwork shall emit low levels of noise and shall not emit more than 35 NC of noise at any point in ductwork

B Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment

C Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory To calculate system effects for air systems use tables and charts found in AMCA 201 Fans and Systems Sections 7 through 10 or in SMACNAs HVAC Systems--Duct Design Sections 5 and 6 Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions

D Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing cleaning adjusting and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed

E Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices such as thermometer wells flow-control devices and manual volume dampers are properly installed and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation

F Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing

G Examine equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed bearings are greased belts are aligned and tight and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation

H Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following

1 Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller

2 Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller

3 Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions

4 Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions

5 Controller set points are set at design values Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions Record default set points if different from design values

6 Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values

I Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing adjusting and balancing procedures

302 PREPARATION

A Prepare a testing adjusting and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures

B Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports Verify the following

1 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete

2 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational

3 Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed

4 Balance dampers are open

303 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in this Section

B Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBBs Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems or to the procedures contained in AABC national standards

C Cut insulation ducts pipes and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures After testing and balancing close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project

D Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable permanent identification material including damper-control positions and similar controls and devices to show final settings

304 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES

A Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets Obtain manufacturers outlet factors and recommended testing procedures Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes

B Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements

C Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-air dampers and through the supply-fan discharge

D Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path

E Check for airflow blockages

F Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning

G Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components

305 ACU AND SCRUBBER SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES

A Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer

1 Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows

a Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions

b Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection

c Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions

d Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan

2 Measure static pressure across each ACU and Scrubber component

a Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters

3 Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions

4 Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer Make required adjustments to pulley sizes motor sizes and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes

5 Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur Measure amperage in full cooling and full heating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower

B Adjust volume dampers for Scrubber fresh air duct and ACU main ducts and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances

1 Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved

2 Remeasure each branch duct after all have been adjusted Continue to adjust branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances

3 Adjust and mark Scrubber factory provided internal damper settings and adjust limits of fresh air control damper so as to achieve maximum and minimum fresh air volumes as specified in drawings

4 Manual damper in fresh air duct shall remain fully open and shall serve as an auxiliary damper to be positioned when motorized damper fails With fresh air motorized damper in fully open position mark position of fresh air manual damper to achieve the minimum fresh air flow rate as specified in drawings Return manual damper in fresh air duct to fully open position for normal use

C Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments

1 Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturers written instructions and calculating factors

D Adjust terminal outlets to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values Make initial adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals

1 Adjust each outlet in the space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents

2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts

3 Make final adjustments using extractors and terminal dampers as needed

306 MOTORS

Motors 12 HP and Larger Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data

1 Manufacturer model and serial numbers

2 Motor horsepower rating

3 Motor rpm

4 Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor

5 Nameplate and measured voltage each phase

6 Nameplate and measured amperage each phase

7 Starter thermal-protection-element rating

307 CONDENSING UNITS

Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures

308 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned

B Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements

C Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper operators

D Note control device positions and correlate with airflow measurements Note the speed of response to input changes

E Record voltages of power supply and controller output Determine if the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply

F Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations

309 TOLERANCES

A Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances

1 ACU and Scrubber Supply Fans Plus 5 to plus 10 percent

2 ACU Air Terminals 0 to plus 10 percent

3 Scrubber Fresh Air Plus 5 to plus 10 percent

310 REPORTING

Initial Construction-Phase Report Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in Examination Article above prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing Recommend changes systems duct dimensions and equipment fan characteristics to achieve stated air flow rates Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices

311 FINAL REPORT

A General All sheets of Final Report SHALL BE SUBMITTED IN BOUND HARD-COPIES AND ELECTRONIC COPIES Bound hardcopies shall be computer printout in letter-quality font on standard bond paper in 3-ring binder tabulated and divided into

sections by tested and balanced systems Electronic copies shall be in ADOBE ACROBAT RELEASE 40 (pdf files) or later and shall be submitted on CD-ROMs Electronic documents shall be filed and titled in an organized directory structure in accordance with the sections of the hardcopy report

B Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer

1 Include a list of the instruments used for procedures along with proof of calibration

C Final Report Contents In addition to the certified field report data include the following

1 Fan curves

2 Manufacturers test data

3 Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers

D General Report Data In addition to the form titles and entries include the following data in the final report as applicable

1 Title page

2 Name and address of testing adjusting and balancing Agent

3 Project name

4 Project location

5 Engineers name and address

7 Contractors name and address

8 Report date

9 Signature of testing adjusting and balancing Agent who certifies the report

10 Summary of contents including the following

a Design versus final performance

b Notable characteristics of systems

c Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents

11 Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment

12 Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values

13 Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following

a Settings for outside-air dampers

b Conditions of filters

c Cooling coil wet- and dry-bulb conditions

d Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter

e Other system operating conditions that affect performance

E ACU Test Report Include the following

1 Unit Data Include the following

a Unit identification

b Make and type

c Model number and unit size

d Manufacturers serial number

e Unit arrangement and class

f Number of belts make and size

g Number of filters type and size

2 Motor Data Include the following

a Make and frame type and size

b Horsepower and rpm

c Volts phase and hertz

d Full-load amperage and service factor

e Sheave make size in inches and bore

f Sheave dimensions center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

3 Cooling Coil Data Include the following

a Coil type

b Number of rows

c Fin spacing in fins per inch

d Make and model number

e Face area in sq ft

f Tube size in NPS

g Tube and fin materials

h Circuiting arrangement

4 Heating Strip Data Include the following

a Capacity in Btuh

b Number of stages

c Connected volts phase and hertz

d Rated amperage

e Airflow rate in cfm

f Face area in sq ft

g Minimum face velocity in fpm

5 General Test Data Include design and actual values for the following

a Total airflow rate in cfm

b Total system static pressure in inches wg

c Fan rpm

d Discharge static pressure in inches wg

e Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg

6 Cooling Coil Test Data Include design and actual values for the following

a Airflow rate in cfm

b Average face velocity in fpm

c Air pressure drop in inches wg

d Entering-air wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F

e Leaving-air wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F

f Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types

g Refrigerant suction pressure in psig

h Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F

7 Heating Strip Test Data Include design and actual values for the following

a Heat output in Btuh

b Airflow rate in cfm

c Air velocity in fpm

d Entering-air temperature in deg F

e Leaving-air temperature in deg F

f Voltage at each connection

g Amperage for each phase

F Compressor and Condenser Reports For refrigerant side of unitary systems include the following

b Unit make and model number

c Manufacturers compressor serial numbers

d Compressor make

e Compressor model and serial numbers

f Refrigerant weight in lb

g Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F

2 Test Data Include design and actual values for the following

a Entering-air dry-bulb temperature in deg F

b Leaving-air dry-bulb temperature in deg F

c Unloader set points

d Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig

e High-pressure-cutout set point in psig

f Suction pressure in psig

g Suction temperature in deg F

h Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig

i Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F

j Oil pressure in psig

k Oil temperature in deg F

l Voltage at each connection

m Amperage for each phase

n The kW input

o Condenser fan rpm

p Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm

q Condenser fan motor make frame size rpm and horsepower

r Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection

s Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase

G Scrubber Test Report Include the following

b Make and type

e Discharge arrangement

b Minimum Fresh Air airflow rate in cfm

c Maximum Fresh Air airflow rate in cfm

d Total system static pressure in inches wg

e Fan rpm

f Stage 1 Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg

g Stage 2 Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg

h Stage 3 Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg

H Rectangular Duct Reports Record the following

1 Report Data Include the following

a Duct static pressure in inches wg

b Duct size in inches

c Design airflow rate in cfm

d Design velocity in fpm

e Actual airflow rate in cfm

f Actual average velocity in fpm

I Air Registers Reports For registers include the following

a Location

b Test apparatus used

c Air-register-device number from system diagram

d Air-register-device type and model number

e Air-register-device size

f Air-register-device effective area in sq ft

b Air velocity in fpm

c Final airflow rate in cfm

d Final velocity in fpm

J Instrument Calibration Reports For instrument calibration include the following

a Instrument type and make

b Serial number

c Application

d Dates of use

e Dates of calibration

312 ADDITIONAL TESTS

Provide the re-testing of all scheduled Scrubber Units prior to twenty-four (24) months after acceptance by the Owner (after the final completion date of the project as shown on the Contract Documents) Coordinate and plan for the re-testing with the Owner within twenty-one (21) months after final completion date to allow proper time to schedule with the Ownerrsquos operations and maintenance staff

END OF SECTION

000_Spec Cover2

001_Seals Page

HEI Seals Page

SUBS Page

005_TOC_SARSUB1_r1

112_02831

113_03392

114_04090

Section 04090

Masonry Accessories

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes

12 Related requirements



13 REFERENCES


16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS







E Wire joint reinforcement single Wythe type Conforming to ASTM A 951 with ASTM A 82 9gauge wire side rails and 9-gauge cross ties sized to suit application and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 Class B (minimum 15 ounces zinc per square foot



part 3 - EXECUTION

31 (not used)

32 (not used)

33 INSTALLATION



115_04100

Section 04100

Mortar and Masonry Grout

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES




14 DEFINITIONS




16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings



E Not Used




18 (NOT USED)



110-111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS



C Aggregate

D Admixtures


22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

B Grout Mixes

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION




33 ADJUSTING


116_04211

117_04220

Section 04220

Concrete Masonry Units

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY


12 Related REQUIREMENTS



13 REFERENCES


1 C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

2 C 140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units

3 C 426 - Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units

14 DEFINITIONS

A Standard Level of Quality High quality but conventional nearly free of chips cracks or other imperfections detracting from appearance when discernible and identified from distance of 20 feet under diffused lighting When level of quality is not

15 design and performance criteria

A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS



C Test Reports

1 Compressive strength

2 Linear shrinkage

3 Moisture content as a percentage of total absorbtion

4 Total absorbtion

5 Unit weight



a Certify recycled material content for recycled content products

b Certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site




A Mock-Up

1 Prior to starting construction of masonry construct minimum 4 foot square mock-up

2 Use accepted materials containing each different kind and color of concrete masonry units and water repellant to illustrate wall design

3 When not accepted construct another mock-up

4 When accepted mock-up will be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work

5 Upon completion of Project dispose of mock-ups in legal manner at offsite location in accordance with Section 01505






19 project conditions





a In accordance with applicable building code when ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour implement hot weather protec


c Do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of placing masonry units

d Place masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar



110 - 111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS









6 Recycled Content Min 50 percent Pre-Consumer


a Featherlite Corp





22 ACCESSORIES


B Integral water repellant for all masonry units (added during manufacture) and in all mortar (added during mortar mixing) shall be ldquoDry-Block II Admixturerdquo by WR Grace Krete Industries or approved equal liquid polymeric admixture at rates as re


1 Approved sealants include (but not limited to)

a Prime-A-Pell 200 as manufactured by Tnemec Inc

b Intraguard as manufactured by WR Meadows Inc


PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection




32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores







1 Provide Standard Level of Quality

2 Lay concrete masonry units dry

3 Lay units in uniform and true courses level plumb and without projections or offset of adjacent units

4 Lay units to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled with grout or insulation

5 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to maintain clear unobstructed continuous vertical cell measuring not less than 2 by 3 inches

6 Place mortar with full coverage of joints at webs of all cells and face shells

7 Butter vertical head joints for thickness equal to face shell thickness of units and shove joints tightly together so that mortar bonds to both masonry units

8 Solidly fill joints from face of units to inside face of cells

9 Lay units to desired height with joints of uniform thickness

10 Bond shall be plumb throughout

11 Lay units to avoid formation of cracks when units are placed Keep cells of units as free of mortar as possible as masonry wall height increases

12 When positions of units shift after mortar has stiffened bond is broken or cracks are formed relay units in new mortar

13 Remove mortar mortar droppings debris and other obstructions and materials from inside of cell walls to receive grout or insulation

14 Seal cleanouts after inspection and before grouting or placing insulation

C Bond Pattern




E Mortar Joints


2 Tool exposed joints slightly concave Strike concealed joints flush

3 Make vertical and horizontal joints 38 inch thick

4 Where fresh masonry joins totally or partially set masonry clean and roughen set masonry before laying new units


1 Lap splice longitudinal wire joint reinforcement minimum 75 wire diameters

2 Place longitudinal wires in approximate centers of mortar beds with minimum 58-inch mortar cover on exposed faces

3 Provide intersecting masonry walls with prefabricated wire joint reinforcement tees

4 Rake intersecting joints 12 inch and caulk joints


1 Where horizontal and vertical bars are spliced and adjacent lap splices are separated by more than 3 inches the lap splice length shall be 72 bar diameters Where adjacent lap splices are separated by 3 inches or less the lap splice length shall


3 Obtain acceptance of reinforcement placement before grouting

4 Unless specified on drawings fill spaces and cells containing reinforcing bars solidly with grout

a Low-Lift Grouting







4) Grout shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6 feet in depth

5) Each lift shall be allowed to set for 10 minutes after initial consolidation of grout before successive lift is placed

6) The full height of each section of wall shall be grouted in one day

5 Grout in cells shall have full contact with surface of concrete footings

6 When grouting stops for one hour or longer form horizontal construction joints by stopping grout placement 1-12 inches below top of uppermost unit containing grout


8 Placement

a Use a hand bucket concrete hopper or grout pump

b Place grout in final position within 1-12 hours after mixing Place grout so as to completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates

c Do not insert vibrators into lower grout placements that are in a semi-solidified state

H Bond Beams

1 Place horizontal reinforcement and solidly grout bond beam units in place

2 Provide wire mesh at openings in bottom of bond beams to support grout where walls are not grouted solid




J Control Joints

1 Provide in masonry walls at locations indicated on the Drawings

2 Make full height and continuous in appearance

3 Run bond beams and bond beam reinforcing bars continuously through control joints

4 Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed

5 Apply sealant as specified in Section 07900


1 Place horizontal reinforcement in fully grouted bond beam units

2 Use lintel block units where underside of lintel will be exposed

3 Provide minimum of 8-inch bearing at each end of lintel

4 Embed reinforcing bars minimum 24 inches or 48 bar diameters whichever is longer into wall past edges of openings or as indicated on the Drawings


L Steel Door Frames



M Bearing Plates


N Anchor Bolts

1 Hold anchor bolts in place with template during grouting to assure precise alignment

2 Do not cut or ream members being anchored or use other means to accommodate misaligned anchor bolts in roof deck support angles

3 Provide minimum 6-inch wide grouted concrete unit masonry entirely around anchor bolts and other attachment devices

O Wall Ties



P Enclosures






R Patching


S Water Curing


T Miscellaneous





1 Grout Pumps

a Do not pump grout through aluminum tubes

b Operate pumps to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets

c Upon completion of each days pumping eject grout from pipeline without contamination or segregation of the grout

1) Remove waste materials and debris from the equipment

2) Dispose of waste materials debris and all flushing water outside the masonry

2 Vibrators


b Maintain at least 1 spare vibrator at the site at all times

c Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine

d Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation

33 CONSTRUCTION



a In Adjacent Masonry Units 18 inch

b In 10 Feet 14 inch

c In Any Story or 20 Feet maximum 38 inch

d In 40 Feet or More 12 inch


a In Any Story or 20 Feet Maximum 14 inch




b In 40 Feet or more 12 inch





a Minus 14 inch

b Plus 12 inch


A Site Tests

1 OWNER will have tests performed by an independent laboratory

2 Have minimum 3 concrete masonry units of each type proposed for Project tested in accordance with ASTM C 90 C 140 and C 426 to verify conformance to Specifications

3 Tests shall include compressive strength linear shrinkage moisture content as percent of total absorption total absorption and unit weight


1 OWNER will employ a qualified masonry special inspector for continuous special inspection of the masonry work Acceptance by a State or municipality having a program of examining and certifying masonry inspectors will be considered adequate qualifi



c Check brand and type of cement lime (if used) and source of sand

d Verify that foundation is clean rough and ready to receive units

e Check reinforcing steel dowels for correct location straightness proper alignment spacing size and length

f Observe field proportioning of mortar Visually check aggregate to determine uniformity of grading cleanliness and moisture

g Verify that joints are full of mortar and kept tight during work Inspect grout cells to verify that fins will not interfere with grouting Verify that masons keep grout cells clean of mortar droppings and inspect to determine compliance

h Continuously observe placing of grout

i Perform or supervise performance of required sampling and testing


35 CLEANING








2 Do not use muriatic acid as cleaning solution

3 Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment

36 PROTECTION


B Bracing




1 Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction

2 Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed plus 4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall

3 Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall Do not permit other persons to enter zone

4 Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting elements to prevent overturning and collapse

118_05120

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS












PART 2 - PRODUCTS











23 PRIMER


24 GROUT


25 FABRICATION


26 SHOP CONNECTIONS



27 SHOP PRIMING




PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION



32 ERECTION











119_05210

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings









PART 2 - PRODUCTS





23 PRIMERS








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION







120_05310

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings










PART 2 - PRODUCTS



22 ROOF DECK



23 ACCESSORIES







PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION























35 PROTECTION


121_05500

Section 05500

Metal Fabrications

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes




13 REFERENCES







16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings


22 MATERIALS





C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

E Metal Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate


H Stairs


PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION


32 INSTALLATION



C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

E Stairs

122_06100

123_07130

124_07210

125_07220

126_07411

127_07620

128_07920

129_08111

130_08330

131_08411

132_08711

133_08800

134_09900

135_10400

136_10441

137_13851

138_15061

139_15083

140_15183

141_15184

142_15500

143_15780

144_15783

145_15815

146_15820

147_15855

148_15990

PROJECT MANUAL

Submitted by

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

After Design)

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

SECTION 02831

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 DESCRIPTION

102 SUBMITTALS

104 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

zinc coating

J Miscellaneous

202 - 204 (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

drainage flow

end of mounted arm

swings shut

302 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 03392

PART 1 GENERAL

103 REFERENCES

Scale Tire

105 SUBMITTALS

fer to AASHTO T 242

PART 2 PRODUCTS

1 Silane

2 Siloxane

2 High-gloss finish

C Compliance

4 VOC Content lt5gL

9172018

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

2 Shotblasting

3 Sandblasting

4 Etching

302 APPLICATION

A Application Rate

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04090

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes

13 REFERENCES

16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 (NOT USED)

32 (NOT USED)

33 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04100

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

E Not Used

18 (NOT USED)

110-111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

C Aggregate

D Admixtures

cement

2 Grout Admixture

22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

1 Mortar Mixing

added to mixer

b Shovel count

B Grout Mixes

1 Grout Mixing

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

33 ADJUSTING

304 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 04211

BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Face brick

2 Mortar and grout

3 Ties and anchors

4 Embedded flashing

1 Face brick

2 Colored mortar

1 Masonry units

ASTM C 67

ingredients

9172018

approval

and oil

9172018

masonry

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 BRICK

9172018

surfaces finished

and lintels

following

3 Grade SW

4 Type FBS

not effloresced

9172018

J Water Potable

204 REINFORCEMENT

coating

thane or PVC

9172018

208 MORTAR MIXES

indicated

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

textures

9172018

303 TOLERANCES

B Lines and Levels

C Joints

other locations

9172018

masonry

joints

on footings

joints

indicated

hoes or chisels

comparison purposes

masonry

masking tape

Notes 20

9172018

Handbook

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04220

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS

C Test Reports

A Mock-Up

110 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

a Featherlite Corp

22 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection

32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores

C Bond Pattern

E Mortar Joints

with grout

a Low-Lift Grouting

8 Placement

H Bond Beams

not grouted solid

J Control Joints

L Steel Door Frames

M Bearing Plates

N Anchor Bolts

O Wall Ties

P Enclosures

R Patching

S Water Curing

T Miscellaneous

1 Grout Pumps

masonry

2 Vibrators

33 CONSTRUCTION

A Site Tests

35 CLEANING

36 PROTECTION

B Bracing

307 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMER

24 GROUT

25 FABRICATION

26 SHOP CONNECTIONS

27 SHOP PRIMING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 ERECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05310

STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Roof deck

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 ROOF DECK

23 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

35 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

13 REFERENCES

14 - 15 (NOT USED)

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

2 Test Reports

a Gratings

17 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 MATERIALS

ItemASTMStandard No

A 570--

A 36 --

A 325A 490

B 308Alloy 6061-T6

2 Size

C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

1 General

2 Metal Ladders

b Rungs

E Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate

H Stairs

1 Steel Stairs

a General

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 INSTALLATION

C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Grating

E Stairs

1 General

33 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

Project

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

9172018

202 LUMBER GENERAL

lumber

and where indicated

of Review

204 FASTENERS

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

construction

and plywood

with the following

required

303 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

822018

SECTION 07130

11 SUMMARY

12 REFERENCES

13 SUBMITTALS

21 MATERIALS

22 ACCESSORIES

A Seams

822018

instructions

D Accessories

31 PREPARATION

32 INSTALLATION

possible

ture and tensile

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 REFERENCES

tions agencies

103 SUBMITTALS

C Samples

this Section

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

952-3170

202 MATERIALS

A Basis of Design

203 FASTENERS

A Basis of Design

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

penetrations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07220

ROOF INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

semblies

103 REFERENCES

104 DEFINITIONS

105 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

C Samples

462018

proof covering

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

202 MATERIALS

462018

D Related Materials

301 EXAMINATION

deforming work

after installation

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07411

PART 1 - GENERAL

12 SUMMARY

9172018

and cost

C Shop Drawings

and special details

D Calculations

by manufacturer

9172018

damage

19 FIELD CONDITIONS

110 COORDINATION

equipment provided

111 WARRANTY

against all leaks

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

than 29 percent

CRRC-1

ASTM E 1980

ASTM E 1514

ASTM E 1637

9172018

lock (90o seam)

following

9172018

manufacturer

25 FABRICATION

9172018

26 FINISHES

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 PREPARATION

manufacturer

9172018

movement

in 61 m)

B Fasteners

manufacturer

instructions

manufacturer

9172018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07620

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

2 Metal flashing

104 SUBMITTALS

9172018

finishes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 METALS

Joint Sealants

790 Type I Style 1b

9172018

seams and solder

ing material

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION

seams and solder

manufacturer

9172018

of finishes

Completion

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

this Section

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

manufacturer

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

teristic

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

following

a Concrete

b Masonry

462018

of joints

stalled

304 CLEANING

305 PROTECTION

462018

3 Class 25

lowing

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08111

11 Section Includes

12 Related Sections

13 References

method

462018

wind load

15 Submittals

information

2 Finishing

4 Accessories

inch (150 mm) legs

462018

with new

19 Scheduling

110 Warranty

decaying or bowing

21 Manufacturers

462018

Telephone (800) 648-6736 (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153

22 Components

aluminum alloy

(246 kgcm2)

inforcement plates

C Aluminum Frames

and jambs

462018

23 Finish

24 Fabrication

25 Accessories

stainless steel

31 Examination

32 Preparation

462018

33 Installation

applications

34 Cleaning

35 Protection

recommendations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08330

PART 1 GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

2 Cycle Life

Fundamentals

103 SUBMITTALS

1 Product Data

cent work

A Qualifications

462018

106 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

202 MATERIALS

A Curtain

per ASTM E84

specified wind load

7 Bottom Bar Finish

2 Configuration

462018

1 Finish

F Weatherstripping

203 ACCESSORIES

A Locking

204 OPERATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

and supports

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

462018

305 DEMONSTRATION

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08411

PART 1 GENERAL

101 WORK INCLUDED

C Glass and Glazing

must be met

of 624 psf

pressure

section 102

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

106 WARRANTIES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

A Aluminum

B Fasteners

C Thermal Barrier

the glass

E Sealant

803 and AAMA 808

F Glass

462018

202 FABRICATION

A General

B Frame

C Finish

1 Organic

PART 3 EXECUTION

30 INSPECTION

A Job Conditions

drawings

302 INSTALLATION

skilled tradesmen

303 ANCHORAGE

loading

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08711

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SCOPE

103 RELATED WORK

Facilities

462018

105 GENERAL

106 QUALIFICATIONS

the Drawings

107 SUBMITTALS

frame suppliers

462018

19 WARRANTY

110 TEMPLATES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 HARDWARE

203 FINISHES

462018

204 FASTENINGS

205 LEVERS AND TRIM

warranty

462018

207 DOOR CLOSERS

requirements

by sex bolts

soffit stops

workmanship

208 HINGES

hardware schedule

462018

209 EXIT DEVICES

requirements

210 DOOR STOPS

211 GASKETING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

462018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

1 Windows

103 DEFINITIONS

publications

surfaces

105 SUBMITTALS

9172018

1 Glazing sealants

2 Glazing gaskets

month period

ANSI Z971

ing jurisdiction

9172018

other causes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 INSULATED GLASS

this characteristic

203 GLAZING TAPES

9172018

following types

sealant

204 GLAZING GASKETS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

9172018

302 PREPARATION

303 GLAZING GENERAL

stallation

heel bead

lications

9172018

surfaces

manufacturer

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

b Light fixtures

a Anodized aluminum

b Stainless steel

462018

103 DEFINITIONS

degree meter

a 60-degree meter

degree meter

104 SUBMITTALS

performance

8 VOC content

462018

108 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

a particular area

302 PREPARATION

priming

462018

als and residue

terial before using

303 APPLICATION

or grilles

flat surfaces

adhesion

462018

304 CLEANING

rials from the site

305 PROTECTION

462018

shop-primed items

mils (0076 mm)

37 mils (0094 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

462018

mils (0031 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

c Other Signs

103 SUBMITTALS

104 WARRANTY

A Inside

B Outside

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Warning Signs

F Concrete Class A

I Site Signs

203 FABRICATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 PROTECTION

305 SCHEDULES

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 10441

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

brackets

Extinguishers

105 WARRANTY

462018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

baked-enamel finish

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

462018

302 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 13851

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Scope of Work

103 COORDINATION

104 SUBMITTALS

4 Test data

A Code Requirements

2 Technical Support

3 Upgrade Service

108 SPARE PARTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Manufacturers

1 Grinnell Simplex

2 Silent Knight

5 Siemens Cerberus

6 General Electric

7 or approved equal

1 Manual stations

2 Heat detectors

3 Smoke detectors

B Power Supply

a LED display

a) First 8 Events

f) Site Plan

A General

205 SMOKE DETECTORS

A General

206 HEAT DETECTORS

210 MISCELLANEOUS

A Wiring

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1 Pre-Test

2 Final Test

304 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15061

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

4 Fastener systems

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

B Manufacturers

8 Grinnell Corp

9 GS Metals Corp

14 Tolco Inc

B Manufacturers

4 Pipe Shields Inc

1 Manufacturers

c Hilti Inc

e MKT Fastening LLC

f Powers Fasteners

PART 3 - EXECUTION

304 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15083

PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

105 COORDINATION

106 SCHEDULING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Phenolic

203 ADHESIVES

204 MASTICS

5 Color White

4 Color White

206 SEALANTS

A Joint Sealants

5 Color Aluminum

5 Color White

3 Color White

c Tee covers

e End caps

f Beveled collars

g Valve covers

209 SECUREMENTS

A Bands

a C amp F Wire

b Childers Products

d RPR Products Inc

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

4 Manholes

5 Handholes

6 Cleanouts

304 PENETRATIONS

309 FINISHES

D Color

5 Finish None

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

104 COORDINATION

105 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

1 Refrigerants

205 REFRIGERANTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

308 SYSTEM CHARGING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15184

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Strainer

105 COORDINATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

203 VALVES

204 STRAINER

b NIBCO INC

B Dielectric Unions

b Calpico Inc

d Drake Specialties

2 Description

c Gasket neoprene

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Applications

306 CONNECTIONS

307 FINISH

309 CLEANING

310 PIPING SCHEDULE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15500

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

7 Concrete Bases

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

G Coatings

g VOC content

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Definitions

B Materials

1 Dielectric Unions

d Epco Sales Inc

a Calpico Inc

b Lochinvar Corp

b Perfection Corp

2 Blue Fresh Air

208 CONCRETE BASES

209 GROUT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

307 GROUTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15780

SCRUBBERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

104 DEFINITIONS

2 Fan curves

5 Motor information

D General

109 DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

J BLOWER

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

A General

B Electrical Wiring

306 CLEANING

308 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

309 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15783

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

110 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Modular Units

1 Liebert Corp

202 MODULAR UNITS

C Evaporator Fans

1 Disconnect Switch

a High Temperature

b Low Temperature

c High Humidity

d Low Humidity

e EC Fan Fault

f Change Filters

g Loss of Air Flow

h Loss of Power

m Custom Alarms

2) Smoke Detected

3) Standby Unit On

2) Remote

3) Return

2) Remote

3) Return

4) Static Pressure

b Run hours

c Average run time

d Starts per day

a Smoke Detection

d Filter Clog

O Smoke Detector

5 SNMP

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

306 CONNECTIONS

308 ADJUSTING

1 Temperature

2 Humidity

3 Lead-Lag Sequence

310 CLEANING

311 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

312 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 DUCT LINER

2 Thickness

a General 1 inch

1 Fan discharge

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B Duct material

303 DUCT LINER

305 CONNECTIONS

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

1 Volume dampers

2 Turning vanes

6 Backdraft dampers

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Air Extractors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 VOLUME DAMPERS

203 TURNING VANES

4 Ruskin Company

I Blade Axles

1 Material Aluminum

M Accessories

3 90-degree stops

2 Listing UL

3 Enclosure NEMA 4

4 Power 120 VAC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

302 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15855

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 Carnes Co Inc

7 Titus

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15990

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

306 MOTORS

3 Motor rpm

309 TOLERANCES

310 REPORTING

311 FINAL REPORT

1 Fan curves

1 Title page

3 Project name

4 Project location

8 Report date

b Make and type

a Coil type

b Number of rows

f Tube size in NPS

a Capacity in Btuh

b Number of stages

d Rated amperage

c Fan rpm

d Compressor make

n The kW input

o Condenser fan rpm

b Make and type

e Fan rpm

a Location

b Serial number

c Application

d Dates of use

END OF SECTION

000_Spec Cover2

001_Seals Page

HEI Seals Page

SUBS Page

005_TOC_SARSUB1_r1

112_02831

113_03392

114_04090

Section 04090

Masonry Accessories

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes




13 REFERENCES


16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS










part 3 - EXECUTION

31 (not used)

32 (not used)

33 INSTALLATION



115_04100

Section 04100


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES




14 DEFINITIONS




16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings



E Not Used




18 (NOT USED)



110-111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS



C Aggregate

D Admixtures


22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

B Grout Mixes

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION




33 ADJUSTING


116_04211

117_04220

Section 04220


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES





14 DEFINITIONS



A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS



C Test Reports


2 Linear shrinkage


4 Total absorbtion

5 Unit weight








A Mock-Up






















110 - 111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS











a Featherlite Corp





22 ACCESSORIES








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection




32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores





















C Bond Pattern




E Mortar Joints















a Low-Lift Grouting













8 Placement




H Bond Beams






J Control Joints












L Steel Door Frames



M Bearing Plates


N Anchor Bolts




O Wall Ties



P Enclosures






R Patching


S Water Curing


T Miscellaneous





1 Grout Pumps






2 Vibrators





33 CONSTRUCTION

















a Minus 14 inch

b Plus 12 inch


A Site Tests
















35 CLEANING










36 PROTECTION


B Bracing








118_05120

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS












PART 2 - PRODUCTS











23 PRIMER


24 GROUT


25 FABRICATION


26 SHOP CONNECTIONS



27 SHOP PRIMING




PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION



32 ERECTION











119_05210

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings









PART 2 - PRODUCTS





23 PRIMERS








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION







120_05310

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings










PART 2 - PRODUCTS



22 ROOF DECK



23 ACCESSORIES







PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION























35 PROTECTION


121_05500

Section 05500

Metal Fabrications

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes




13 REFERENCES







16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings


22 MATERIALS





C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

E Metal Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate


H Stairs


PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION


32 INSTALLATION



C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

E Stairs

122_06100

123_07130

124_07210

125_07220

126_07411

127_07620

128_07920

129_08111

130_08330

131_08411

132_08711

133_08800

134_09900

135_10400

136_10441

137_13851

138_15061

139_15083

140_15183

141_15184

142_15500

143_15780

144_15783

145_15815

146_15820

147_15855

148_15990

PROJECT MANUAL

Submitted by

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

After Design)

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

SECTION 02831

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 DESCRIPTION

102 SUBMITTALS

104 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

zinc coating

J Miscellaneous

202 - 204 (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

drainage flow

end of mounted arm

swings shut

302 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 03392

PART 1 GENERAL

103 REFERENCES

Scale Tire

105 SUBMITTALS

fer to AASHTO T 242

PART 2 PRODUCTS

1 Silane

2 Siloxane

2 High-gloss finish

C Compliance

4 VOC Content lt5gL

9172018

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

2 Shotblasting

3 Sandblasting

4 Etching

302 APPLICATION

A Application Rate

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04090

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes

13 REFERENCES

16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 (NOT USED)

32 (NOT USED)

33 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04100

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

E Not Used

18 (NOT USED)

110-111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

C Aggregate

D Admixtures

cement

2 Grout Admixture

22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

1 Mortar Mixing

added to mixer

b Shovel count

B Grout Mixes

1 Grout Mixing

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

33 ADJUSTING

304 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 04211

BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Face brick

2 Mortar and grout

3 Ties and anchors

4 Embedded flashing

1 Face brick

2 Colored mortar

1 Masonry units

ASTM C 67

ingredients

9172018

approval

and oil

9172018

masonry

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 BRICK

9172018

surfaces finished

and lintels

following

3 Grade SW

4 Type FBS

not effloresced

9172018

J Water Potable

204 REINFORCEMENT

coating

thane or PVC

9172018

208 MORTAR MIXES

indicated

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

textures

9172018

303 TOLERANCES

B Lines and Levels

C Joints

other locations

9172018

masonry

joints

on footings

joints

indicated

hoes or chisels

comparison purposes

masonry

masking tape

Notes 20

9172018

Handbook

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04220

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS

C Test Reports

A Mock-Up

110 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

a Featherlite Corp

22 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection

32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores

C Bond Pattern

E Mortar Joints

with grout

a Low-Lift Grouting

8 Placement

H Bond Beams

not grouted solid

J Control Joints

L Steel Door Frames

M Bearing Plates

N Anchor Bolts

O Wall Ties

P Enclosures

R Patching

S Water Curing

T Miscellaneous

1 Grout Pumps

masonry

2 Vibrators

33 CONSTRUCTION

A Site Tests

35 CLEANING

36 PROTECTION

B Bracing

307 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMER

24 GROUT

25 FABRICATION

26 SHOP CONNECTIONS

27 SHOP PRIMING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 ERECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05310

STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Roof deck

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 ROOF DECK

23 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

35 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

13 REFERENCES

14 - 15 (NOT USED)

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

2 Test Reports

a Gratings

17 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 MATERIALS

ItemASTMStandard No

A 570--

A 36 --

A 325A 490

B 308Alloy 6061-T6

2 Size

C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

1 General

2 Metal Ladders

b Rungs

E Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate

H Stairs

1 Steel Stairs

a General

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 INSTALLATION

C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Grating

E Stairs

1 General

33 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

Project

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

9172018

202 LUMBER GENERAL

lumber

and where indicated

of Review

204 FASTENERS

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

construction

and plywood

with the following

required

303 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

822018

SECTION 07130

11 SUMMARY

12 REFERENCES

13 SUBMITTALS

21 MATERIALS

22 ACCESSORIES

A Seams

822018

instructions

D Accessories

31 PREPARATION

32 INSTALLATION

possible

ture and tensile

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 REFERENCES

tions agencies

103 SUBMITTALS

C Samples

this Section

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

952-3170

202 MATERIALS

A Basis of Design

203 FASTENERS

A Basis of Design

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

penetrations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07220

ROOF INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

semblies

103 REFERENCES

104 DEFINITIONS

105 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

C Samples

462018

proof covering

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

202 MATERIALS

462018

D Related Materials

301 EXAMINATION

deforming work

after installation

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07411

PART 1 - GENERAL

12 SUMMARY

9172018

and cost

C Shop Drawings

and special details

D Calculations

by manufacturer

9172018

damage

19 FIELD CONDITIONS

110 COORDINATION

equipment provided

111 WARRANTY

against all leaks

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

than 29 percent

CRRC-1

ASTM E 1980

ASTM E 1514

ASTM E 1637

9172018

lock (90o seam)

following

9172018

manufacturer

25 FABRICATION

9172018

26 FINISHES

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 PREPARATION

manufacturer

9172018

movement

in 61 m)

B Fasteners

manufacturer

instructions

manufacturer

9172018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07620

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

2 Metal flashing

104 SUBMITTALS

9172018

finishes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 METALS

Joint Sealants

790 Type I Style 1b

9172018

seams and solder

ing material

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION

seams and solder

manufacturer

9172018

of finishes

Completion

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

this Section

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

manufacturer

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

teristic

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

following

a Concrete

b Masonry

462018

of joints

stalled

304 CLEANING

305 PROTECTION

462018

3 Class 25

lowing

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08111

11 Section Includes

12 Related Sections

13 References

method

462018

wind load

15 Submittals

information

2 Finishing

4 Accessories

inch (150 mm) legs

462018

with new

19 Scheduling

110 Warranty

decaying or bowing

21 Manufacturers

462018

Telephone (800) 648-6736 (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153

22 Components

aluminum alloy

(246 kgcm2)

inforcement plates

C Aluminum Frames

and jambs

462018

23 Finish

24 Fabrication

25 Accessories

stainless steel

31 Examination

32 Preparation

462018

33 Installation

applications

34 Cleaning

35 Protection

recommendations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08330

PART 1 GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

2 Cycle Life

Fundamentals

103 SUBMITTALS

1 Product Data

cent work

A Qualifications

462018

106 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

202 MATERIALS

A Curtain

per ASTM E84

specified wind load

7 Bottom Bar Finish

2 Configuration

462018

1 Finish

F Weatherstripping

203 ACCESSORIES

A Locking

204 OPERATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

and supports

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

462018

305 DEMONSTRATION

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08411

PART 1 GENERAL

101 WORK INCLUDED

C Glass and Glazing

must be met

of 624 psf

pressure

section 102

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

106 WARRANTIES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

A Aluminum

B Fasteners

C Thermal Barrier

the glass

E Sealant

803 and AAMA 808

F Glass

462018

202 FABRICATION

A General

B Frame

C Finish

1 Organic

PART 3 EXECUTION

30 INSPECTION

A Job Conditions

drawings

302 INSTALLATION

skilled tradesmen

303 ANCHORAGE

loading

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08711

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SCOPE

103 RELATED WORK

Facilities

462018

105 GENERAL

106 QUALIFICATIONS

the Drawings

107 SUBMITTALS

frame suppliers

462018

19 WARRANTY

110 TEMPLATES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 HARDWARE

203 FINISHES

462018

204 FASTENINGS

205 LEVERS AND TRIM

warranty

462018

207 DOOR CLOSERS

requirements

by sex bolts

soffit stops

workmanship

208 HINGES

hardware schedule

462018

209 EXIT DEVICES

requirements

210 DOOR STOPS

211 GASKETING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

462018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

1 Windows

103 DEFINITIONS

publications

surfaces

105 SUBMITTALS

9172018

1 Glazing sealants

2 Glazing gaskets

month period

ANSI Z971

ing jurisdiction

9172018

other causes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 INSULATED GLASS

this characteristic

203 GLAZING TAPES

9172018

following types

sealant

204 GLAZING GASKETS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

9172018

302 PREPARATION

303 GLAZING GENERAL

stallation

heel bead

lications

9172018

surfaces

manufacturer

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

b Light fixtures

a Anodized aluminum

b Stainless steel

462018

103 DEFINITIONS

degree meter

a 60-degree meter

degree meter

104 SUBMITTALS

performance

8 VOC content

462018

108 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

a particular area

302 PREPARATION

priming

462018

als and residue

terial before using

303 APPLICATION

or grilles

flat surfaces

adhesion

462018

304 CLEANING

rials from the site

305 PROTECTION

462018

shop-primed items

mils (0076 mm)

37 mils (0094 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

462018

mils (0031 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

c Other Signs

103 SUBMITTALS

104 WARRANTY

A Inside

B Outside

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Warning Signs

F Concrete Class A

I Site Signs

203 FABRICATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 PROTECTION

305 SCHEDULES

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 10441

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

brackets

Extinguishers

105 WARRANTY

462018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

baked-enamel finish

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

462018

302 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 13851

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Scope of Work

103 COORDINATION

104 SUBMITTALS

4 Test data

A Code Requirements

2 Technical Support

3 Upgrade Service

108 SPARE PARTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Manufacturers

1 Grinnell Simplex

2 Silent Knight

5 Siemens Cerberus

6 General Electric

7 or approved equal

1 Manual stations

2 Heat detectors

3 Smoke detectors

B Power Supply

a LED display

a) First 8 Events

f) Site Plan

A General

205 SMOKE DETECTORS

A General

206 HEAT DETECTORS

210 MISCELLANEOUS

A Wiring

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1 Pre-Test

2 Final Test

304 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15061

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

4 Fastener systems

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

B Manufacturers

8 Grinnell Corp

9 GS Metals Corp

14 Tolco Inc

B Manufacturers

4 Pipe Shields Inc

1 Manufacturers

c Hilti Inc

e MKT Fastening LLC

f Powers Fasteners

PART 3 - EXECUTION

304 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15083

PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

105 COORDINATION

106 SCHEDULING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Phenolic

203 ADHESIVES

204 MASTICS

5 Color White

4 Color White

206 SEALANTS

A Joint Sealants

5 Color Aluminum

5 Color White

3 Color White

c Tee covers

e End caps

f Beveled collars

g Valve covers

209 SECUREMENTS

A Bands

a C amp F Wire

b Childers Products

d RPR Products Inc

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

4 Manholes

5 Handholes

6 Cleanouts

304 PENETRATIONS

309 FINISHES

D Color

5 Finish None

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

104 COORDINATION

105 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

1 Refrigerants

205 REFRIGERANTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

308 SYSTEM CHARGING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15184

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Strainer

105 COORDINATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

203 VALVES

204 STRAINER

b NIBCO INC

B Dielectric Unions

b Calpico Inc

d Drake Specialties

2 Description

c Gasket neoprene

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Applications

306 CONNECTIONS

307 FINISH

309 CLEANING

310 PIPING SCHEDULE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15500

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

7 Concrete Bases

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

G Coatings

g VOC content

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Definitions

B Materials

1 Dielectric Unions

d Epco Sales Inc

a Calpico Inc

b Lochinvar Corp

b Perfection Corp

2 Blue Fresh Air

208 CONCRETE BASES

209 GROUT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

307 GROUTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15780

SCRUBBERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

104 DEFINITIONS

2 Fan curves

5 Motor information

D General

109 DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

J BLOWER

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

A General

B Electrical Wiring

306 CLEANING

308 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

309 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15783

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

110 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Modular Units

1 Liebert Corp

202 MODULAR UNITS

C Evaporator Fans

1 Disconnect Switch

a High Temperature

b Low Temperature

c High Humidity

d Low Humidity

e EC Fan Fault

f Change Filters

g Loss of Air Flow

h Loss of Power

m Custom Alarms

2) Smoke Detected

3) Standby Unit On

2) Remote

3) Return

2) Remote

3) Return

4) Static Pressure

b Run hours

c Average run time

d Starts per day

a Smoke Detection

d Filter Clog

O Smoke Detector

5 SNMP

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

306 CONNECTIONS

308 ADJUSTING

1 Temperature

2 Humidity

3 Lead-Lag Sequence

310 CLEANING

311 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

312 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 DUCT LINER

2 Thickness

a General 1 inch

1 Fan discharge

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B Duct material

303 DUCT LINER

305 CONNECTIONS

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

1 Volume dampers

2 Turning vanes

6 Backdraft dampers

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Air Extractors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 VOLUME DAMPERS

203 TURNING VANES

4 Ruskin Company

I Blade Axles

1 Material Aluminum

M Accessories

3 90-degree stops

2 Listing UL

3 Enclosure NEMA 4

4 Power 120 VAC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

302 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15855

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 Carnes Co Inc

7 Titus

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15990

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

306 MOTORS

3 Motor rpm

309 TOLERANCES

310 REPORTING

311 FINAL REPORT

1 Fan curves

1 Title page

3 Project name

4 Project location

8 Report date

b Make and type

a Coil type

b Number of rows

f Tube size in NPS

a Capacity in Btuh

b Number of stages

d Rated amperage

c Fan rpm

d Compressor make

n The kW input

o Condenser fan rpm

b Make and type

e Fan rpm

a Location

b Serial number

c Application

d Dates of use

END OF SECTION

000_Spec Cover2

001_Seals Page

HEI Seals Page

SUBS Page

005_TOC_SARSUB1_r1

112_02831

113_03392

114_04090

Section 04090

Masonry Accessories

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes




13 REFERENCES


16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS










part 3 - EXECUTION

31 (not used)

32 (not used)

33 INSTALLATION



115_04100

Section 04100


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES




14 DEFINITIONS




16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings



E Not Used




18 (NOT USED)



110-111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS



C Aggregate

D Admixtures


22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

B Grout Mixes

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION




33 ADJUSTING


116_04211

117_04220

Section 04220


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES





14 DEFINITIONS



A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS



C Test Reports


2 Linear shrinkage


4 Total absorbtion

5 Unit weight








A Mock-Up






















110 - 111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS











a Featherlite Corp





22 ACCESSORIES








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection




32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores





















C Bond Pattern




E Mortar Joints















a Low-Lift Grouting













8 Placement




H Bond Beams






J Control Joints












L Steel Door Frames



M Bearing Plates


N Anchor Bolts




O Wall Ties



P Enclosures






R Patching


S Water Curing


T Miscellaneous





1 Grout Pumps






2 Vibrators





33 CONSTRUCTION

















a Minus 14 inch

b Plus 12 inch


A Site Tests
















35 CLEANING










36 PROTECTION


B Bracing








118_05120

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS












PART 2 - PRODUCTS











23 PRIMER


24 GROUT


25 FABRICATION


26 SHOP CONNECTIONS



27 SHOP PRIMING




PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION



32 ERECTION











119_05210

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings









PART 2 - PRODUCTS





23 PRIMERS








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION







120_05310

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings










PART 2 - PRODUCTS



22 ROOF DECK



23 ACCESSORIES







PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION























35 PROTECTION


121_05500

Section 05500

Metal Fabrications

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes




13 REFERENCES







16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings


22 MATERIALS





C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

E Metal Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate


H Stairs


PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION


32 INSTALLATION



C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

E Stairs

122_06100

123_07130

124_07210

125_07220

126_07411

127_07620

128_07920

129_08111

130_08330

131_08411

132_08711

133_08800

134_09900

135_10400

136_10441

137_13851

138_15061

139_15083

140_15183

141_15184

142_15500

143_15780

144_15783

145_15815

146_15820

147_15855

148_15990

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

After Design)

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

Table of Contents

Document Number

Date Title

SECTION 02831

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 DESCRIPTION

102 SUBMITTALS

104 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

zinc coating

J Miscellaneous

202 - 204 (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

drainage flow

end of mounted arm

swings shut

302 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 03392

PART 1 GENERAL

103 REFERENCES

Scale Tire

105 SUBMITTALS

fer to AASHTO T 242

PART 2 PRODUCTS

1 Silane

2 Siloxane

2 High-gloss finish

C Compliance

4 VOC Content lt5gL

9172018

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

2 Shotblasting

3 Sandblasting

4 Etching

302 APPLICATION

A Application Rate

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04090

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes

13 REFERENCES

16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 (NOT USED)

32 (NOT USED)

33 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04100

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

E Not Used

18 (NOT USED)

110-111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS

C Aggregate

D Admixtures

cement

2 Grout Admixture

22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

1 Mortar Mixing

added to mixer

b Shovel count

B Grout Mixes

1 Grout Mixing

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

33 ADJUSTING

304 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 04211

BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Face brick

2 Mortar and grout

3 Ties and anchors

4 Embedded flashing

1 Face brick

2 Colored mortar

1 Masonry units

ASTM C 67

ingredients

9172018

approval

and oil

9172018

masonry

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 BRICK

9172018

surfaces finished

and lintels

following

3 Grade SW

4 Type FBS

not effloresced

9172018

J Water Potable

204 REINFORCEMENT

coating

thane or PVC

9172018

208 MORTAR MIXES

indicated

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

textures

9172018

303 TOLERANCES

B Lines and Levels

C Joints

other locations

9172018

masonry

joints

on footings

joints

indicated

hoes or chisels

comparison purposes

masonry

masking tape

Notes 20

9172018

Handbook

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04220

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

13 REFERENCES

14 DEFINITIONS

A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS

C Test Reports

A Mock-Up

110 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

a Featherlite Corp

22 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection

32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores

C Bond Pattern

E Mortar Joints

with grout

a Low-Lift Grouting

8 Placement

H Bond Beams

not grouted solid

J Control Joints

L Steel Door Frames

M Bearing Plates

N Anchor Bolts

O Wall Ties

P Enclosures

R Patching

S Water Curing

T Miscellaneous

1 Grout Pumps

masonry

2 Vibrators

33 CONSTRUCTION

A Site Tests

35 CLEANING

36 PROTECTION

B Bracing

307 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMER

24 GROUT

25 FABRICATION

26 SHOP CONNECTIONS

27 SHOP PRIMING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 ERECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 PRIMERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05310

STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

1 Roof deck

B Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 ROOF DECK

23 ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

35 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

13 REFERENCES

14 - 15 (NOT USED)

16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings

2 Test Reports

a Gratings

17 - 111 (NOT USED)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

22 MATERIALS

ItemASTMStandard No

A 570--

A 36 --

A 325A 490

B 308Alloy 6061-T6

2 Size

C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

1 General

2 Metal Ladders

b Rungs

E Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate

H Stairs

1 Steel Stairs

a General

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 INSTALLATION

C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

1 General

2 Aluminum Grating

3 Steel Grating

E Stairs

1 General

33 - 310 (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

Project

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

9172018

202 LUMBER GENERAL

lumber

and where indicated

of Review

204 FASTENERS

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

construction

and plywood

with the following

required

303 PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

822018

SECTION 07130

11 SUMMARY

12 REFERENCES

13 SUBMITTALS

21 MATERIALS

22 ACCESSORIES

A Seams

822018

instructions

D Accessories

31 PREPARATION

32 INSTALLATION

possible

ture and tensile

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 REFERENCES

tions agencies

103 SUBMITTALS

C Samples

this Section

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

952-3170

202 MATERIALS

A Basis of Design

203 FASTENERS

A Basis of Design

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

penetrations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07220

ROOF INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

semblies

103 REFERENCES

104 DEFINITIONS

105 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

C Samples

462018

proof covering

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

202 MATERIALS

462018

D Related Materials

301 EXAMINATION

deforming work

after installation

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07411

PART 1 - GENERAL

12 SUMMARY

9172018

and cost

C Shop Drawings

and special details

D Calculations

by manufacturer

9172018

damage

19 FIELD CONDITIONS

110 COORDINATION

equipment provided

111 WARRANTY

against all leaks

9172018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

than 29 percent

CRRC-1

ASTM E 1980

ASTM E 1514

ASTM E 1637

9172018

lock (90o seam)

following

9172018

manufacturer

25 FABRICATION

9172018

26 FINISHES

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION

32 PREPARATION

manufacturer

9172018

movement

in 61 m)

B Fasteners

manufacturer

instructions

manufacturer

9172018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 07620

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

2 Metal flashing

104 SUBMITTALS

9172018

finishes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 METALS

Joint Sealants

790 Type I Style 1b

9172018

seams and solder

ing material

9172018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

have been corrected

302 INSTALLATION

seams and solder

manufacturer

9172018

of finishes

Completion

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

this Section

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

manufacturer

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

teristic

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

following

a Concrete

b Masonry

462018

of joints

stalled

304 CLEANING

305 PROTECTION

462018

3 Class 25

lowing

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08111

11 Section Includes

12 Related Sections

13 References

method

462018

wind load

15 Submittals

information

2 Finishing

4 Accessories

inch (150 mm) legs

462018

with new

19 Scheduling

110 Warranty

decaying or bowing

21 Manufacturers

462018

Telephone (800) 648-6736 (941) 746-4104 Fax (941) 746-5153

22 Components

aluminum alloy

(246 kgcm2)

inforcement plates

C Aluminum Frames

and jambs

462018

23 Finish

24 Fabrication

25 Accessories

stainless steel

31 Examination

32 Preparation

462018

33 Installation

applications

34 Cleaning

35 Protection

recommendations

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08330

PART 1 GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

2 Cycle Life

Fundamentals

103 SUBMITTALS

1 Product Data

cent work

A Qualifications

462018

106 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURER

202 MATERIALS

A Curtain

per ASTM E84

specified wind load

7 Bottom Bar Finish

2 Configuration

462018

1 Finish

F Weatherstripping

203 ACCESSORIES

A Locking

204 OPERATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

and supports

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

462018

305 DEMONSTRATION

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08411

PART 1 GENERAL

101 WORK INCLUDED

C Glass and Glazing

must be met

of 624 psf

pressure

section 102

104 SUBMITTALS

462018

106 WARRANTIES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

201 MATERIALS

A Aluminum

B Fasteners

C Thermal Barrier

the glass

E Sealant

803 and AAMA 808

F Glass

462018

202 FABRICATION

A General

B Frame

C Finish

1 Organic

PART 3 EXECUTION

30 INSPECTION

A Job Conditions

drawings

302 INSTALLATION

skilled tradesmen

303 ANCHORAGE

loading

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 08711

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SCOPE

103 RELATED WORK

Facilities

462018

105 GENERAL

106 QUALIFICATIONS

the Drawings

107 SUBMITTALS

frame suppliers

462018

19 WARRANTY

110 TEMPLATES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 HARDWARE

203 FINISHES

462018

204 FASTENINGS

205 LEVERS AND TRIM

warranty

462018

207 DOOR CLOSERS

requirements

by sex bolts

soffit stops

workmanship

208 HINGES

hardware schedule

462018

209 EXIT DEVICES

requirements

210 DOOR STOPS

211 GASKETING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

462018

END OF SECTION

9172018

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

1 Windows

103 DEFINITIONS

publications

surfaces

105 SUBMITTALS

9172018

1 Glazing sealants

2 Glazing gaskets

month period

ANSI Z971

ing jurisdiction

9172018

other causes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 INSULATED GLASS

this characteristic

203 GLAZING TAPES

9172018

following types

sealant

204 GLAZING GASKETS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

9172018

302 PREPARATION

303 GLAZING GENERAL

stallation

heel bead

lications

9172018

surfaces

manufacturer

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

b Light fixtures

a Anodized aluminum

b Stainless steel

462018

103 DEFINITIONS

degree meter

a 60-degree meter

degree meter

104 SUBMITTALS

performance

8 VOC content

462018

108 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

462018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

a particular area

302 PREPARATION

priming

462018

als and residue

terial before using

303 APPLICATION

or grilles

flat surfaces

adhesion

462018

304 CLEANING

rials from the site

305 PROTECTION

462018

shop-primed items

mils (0076 mm)

37 mils (0094 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

462018

mils (0031 mm)

surfaces

mils (0066 mm)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

c Other Signs

103 SUBMITTALS

104 WARRANTY

A Inside

B Outside

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Warning Signs

F Concrete Class A

I Site Signs

203 FABRICATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 PREPARATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 PROTECTION

305 SCHEDULES

END OF SECTION

462018

SECTION 10441

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUMMARY

103 SUBMITTALS

brackets

Extinguishers

105 WARRANTY

462018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

baked-enamel finish

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

462018

302 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

SECTION 13851

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

A Scope of Work

103 COORDINATION

104 SUBMITTALS

4 Test data

A Code Requirements

2 Technical Support

3 Upgrade Service

108 SPARE PARTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Manufacturers

1 Grinnell Simplex

2 Silent Knight

5 Siemens Cerberus

6 General Electric

7 or approved equal

1 Manual stations

2 Heat detectors

3 Smoke detectors

B Power Supply

a LED display

a) First 8 Events

f) Site Plan

A General

205 SMOKE DETECTORS

A General

206 HEAT DETECTORS

210 MISCELLANEOUS

A Wiring

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1 Pre-Test

2 Final Test

304 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15061

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

4 Fastener systems

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

B Manufacturers

8 Grinnell Corp

9 GS Metals Corp

14 Tolco Inc

B Manufacturers

4 Pipe Shields Inc

1 Manufacturers

c Hilti Inc

e MKT Fastening LLC

f Powers Fasteners

PART 3 - EXECUTION

304 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15083

PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

105 COORDINATION

106 SCHEDULING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

B Phenolic

203 ADHESIVES

204 MASTICS

5 Color White

4 Color White

206 SEALANTS

A Joint Sealants

5 Color Aluminum

5 Color White

3 Color White

c Tee covers

e End caps

f Beveled collars

g Valve covers

209 SECUREMENTS

A Bands

a C amp F Wire

b Childers Products

d RPR Products Inc

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

4 Manholes

5 Handholes

6 Cleanouts

304 PENETRATIONS

309 FINISHES

D Color

5 Finish None

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 SUBMITTALS

104 COORDINATION

105 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

1 Refrigerants

205 REFRIGERANTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

308 SYSTEM CHARGING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15184

PART 1 - GENERAL

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Strainer

105 COORDINATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

203 VALVES

204 STRAINER

b NIBCO INC

B Dielectric Unions

b Calpico Inc

d Drake Specialties

2 Description

c Gasket neoprene

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A Applications

306 CONNECTIONS

307 FINISH

309 CLEANING

310 PIPING SCHEDULE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15500

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

7 Concrete Bases

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

G Coatings

g VOC content

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A Definitions

B Materials

1 Dielectric Unions

d Epco Sales Inc

a Calpico Inc

b Lochinvar Corp

b Perfection Corp

2 Blue Fresh Air

208 CONCRETE BASES

209 GROUT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

307 GROUTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15780

SCRUBBERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

104 DEFINITIONS

2 Fan curves

5 Motor information

D General

109 DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 GENERAL

J BLOWER

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

A General

B Electrical Wiring

306 CLEANING

308 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

309 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15783

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

110 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

201 MANUFACTURERS

B Modular Units

1 Liebert Corp

202 MODULAR UNITS

C Evaporator Fans

1 Disconnect Switch

a High Temperature

b Low Temperature

c High Humidity

d Low Humidity

e EC Fan Fault

f Change Filters

g Loss of Air Flow

h Loss of Power

m Custom Alarms

2) Smoke Detected

3) Standby Unit On

2) Remote

3) Return

2) Remote

3) Return

4) Static Pressure

b Run hours

c Average run time

d Starts per day

a Smoke Detection

d Filter Clog

O Smoke Detector

5 SNMP

PART 3 - EXECUTION

303 EXAMINATION

304 INSTALLATION

306 CONNECTIONS

308 ADJUSTING

1 Temperature

2 Humidity

3 Lead-Lag Sequence

310 CLEANING

311 COMMISSIONING

2 Unit is level

312 TRAINING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

104 SUBMITTALS

B Product Data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 DUCT LINER

2 Thickness

a General 1 inch

1 Fan discharge

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B Duct material

303 DUCT LINER

305 CONNECTIONS

306 ADJUSTING

307 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

1 Volume dampers

2 Turning vanes

6 Backdraft dampers

102 SUBMITTALS

3 Air Extractors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

202 VOLUME DAMPERS

203 TURNING VANES

4 Ruskin Company

I Blade Axles

1 Material Aluminum

M Accessories

3 90-degree stops

2 Listing UL

3 Enclosure NEMA 4

4 Power 120 VAC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 INSTALLATION

302 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15855

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3 Carnes Co Inc

7 Titus

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 INSTALLATION

303 ADJUSTING

304 CLEANING

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15990

PART 1 - GENERAL

101 SUMMARY

102 DEFINITIONS

103 SUBMITTALS

106 COORDINATION

107 WARRANTY

PART 3 - EXECUTION

301 EXAMINATION

302 PREPARATION

306 MOTORS

3 Motor rpm

309 TOLERANCES

310 REPORTING

311 FINAL REPORT

1 Fan curves

1 Title page

3 Project name

4 Project location

8 Report date

b Make and type

a Coil type

b Number of rows

f Tube size in NPS

a Capacity in Btuh

b Number of stages

d Rated amperage

c Fan rpm

d Compressor make

n The kW input

o Condenser fan rpm

b Make and type

e Fan rpm

a Location

b Serial number

c Application

d Dates of use

END OF SECTION

000_Spec Cover2

001_Seals Page

HEI Seals Page

SUBS Page

005_TOC_SARSUB1_r1

112_02831

113_03392

114_04090

Section 04090

Masonry Accessories

part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section includes




13 REFERENCES


16 SUBMITTALS

B Shop drawings

C Product data

PART 2 PRODUCTS










part 3 - EXECUTION

31 (not used)

32 (not used)

33 INSTALLATION



115_04100

Section 04100


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES




14 DEFINITIONS




16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings



E Not Used




18 (NOT USED)



110-111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS

21 MATERIALS



C Aggregate

D Admixtures


22 MIXES

A Mortar Mixes

B Grout Mixes

23 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION




33 ADJUSTING


116_04211

117_04220

Section 04220


part 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY





13 REFERENCES





14 DEFINITIONS



A LEED Requirements

16 SUBMITTALS



C Test Reports


2 Linear shrinkage


4 Total absorbtion

5 Unit weight








A Mock-Up






















110 - 111 (NOT USED)

part 2 - PRODUCTS











a Featherlite Corp





22 ACCESSORIES








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 PREPARATION

A Protection




32 INSTALLATION

A Forms and Shores





















C Bond Pattern




E Mortar Joints















a Low-Lift Grouting













8 Placement




H Bond Beams






J Control Joints












L Steel Door Frames



M Bearing Plates


N Anchor Bolts




O Wall Ties



P Enclosures






R Patching


S Water Curing


T Miscellaneous





1 Grout Pumps






2 Vibrators





33 CONSTRUCTION

















a Minus 14 inch

b Plus 12 inch


A Site Tests
















35 CLEANING










36 PROTECTION


B Bracing








118_05120

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes

12 DEFINITIONS












PART 2 - PRODUCTS











23 PRIMER


24 GROUT


25 FABRICATION


26 SHOP CONNECTIONS



27 SHOP PRIMING




PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION



32 ERECTION











119_05210

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings









PART 2 - PRODUCTS





23 PRIMERS








PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 INSTALLATION







120_05310

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes



B Shop Drawings










PART 2 - PRODUCTS



22 ROOF DECK



23 ACCESSORIES







PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION























35 PROTECTION


121_05500

Section 05500

Metal Fabrications

PART 1 - GENERAL

11 SUMMARY

A Section Includes




13 REFERENCES







16 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data

B Shop Drawings


22 MATERIALS





C Concrete Inserts

D Ladders

E Metal Gratings

F Metal Tread Plate


H Stairs


PART 3 - EXECUTION

31 EXAMINATION


32 INSTALLATION



C Ladders

D Metal Gratings

E Stairs

122_06100

123_07130

124_07210

125_07220

126_07411

127_07620

128_07920

129_08111

130_08330

131_08411

132_08711

133_08800

134_09900

135_10400

136_10441

137_13851

138_15061

139_15083

140_15183

141_15184

142_15500

143_15780

144_15783

145_15815

146_15820

147_15855

148_15990